HomeMy WebLinkAbout09-1984
CITY OF DENTON, TEXAS
SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF
HOBSON LANE LIFT STATION a
,
CONTRACT #9351
i
SEPTEMBER, 1984
MAYOR i
UTILITY BOARD
ROLAND LANEY, CHAIRMAN RICHARD O. STEWART
EDWARD COOMES CITY COUNCIL
LEONARD ►iERRINQ, JR. l_INNIE McADAMS
NANCY BOYD MARK CHEW
JOHN THOMPSON
JIM RIDDLESPERGER
CHARLES HOPKINS
RAY STEPHENS
f
CITY MANAGER
CHRIS HARTUNG
OIRECTOH OF UTILITIES
R.E. NELSON, P.E.
ASSISTANT DIRECTOR OF UTILITIES
C. DAVID HAM, P.E.
I
FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC.
r CONSULTING ENGINEERS
` FORT WORTH, TEXAS
4
t
f
J
N
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
INVITATION FOR BIDS 00010-1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100-1
PROPOSAL 00300-1
NOTICE OF AWARD NW-1
NOTICE TO PROCEED NP-1
CONTRACT AGREEMENT 1
PERFORMANCE BOND 3
' PAYMENT BOND 5
GENERAL CONDITIONS GC-1 ,
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-1
l
DETAIL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION
General Construction Requirements 01001
" Earthwork 02201
Chain Link Fence and Gates 02444
Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways 02524
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings 02622
Concrete Sewer Manholes 02647
Concrete Formwork 03100
Concrete Reinforcement 03200
Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300
Structural Steel 05120
Miscellaneous Metals 05710
Painting 09905
General Equipment Stipulations 11000
Submersible Sewage Pumps 11414
Hoists 14350
Cyst iron Pipe and Fittings 15062
Valves 15100
General Electrical Requirements 14000
Wire and Conduit System 16100
Electrical Equipment 16150
Low Voltage Motor Control Equipment 16181
Lighting System 16500
s j
i3k .'e ndlr.
1
I
P
' Denton, Texas
Hobson Lane Lift Station
s Contract No. 9351
'i
Addendum No. 1
Bids to be opened 2:00 P.M., December 11, 1984, II
i 1
SPECIFICATIONS
1. Section 00800 - %PPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS: Add the following:
7. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION EASEMENT: A temporary easement has
been obte ned on the adjacent property to the east and south of the
existing lift station site. This area consists of the area #
bordered by a line parallel to and 100' east of the west boundary
t of the existing site and by a line parallel to and 100' south of
the north boundary of the existing site (as shown in Figure 1 of
this addendum). The easement will expire at the end of June 1985.
d At the beginning of construction of the
chain link fence is to be constructed betweencthe temporaryrcon-
struction easement and the property to the east and south of the
4 existing site. At the end of construction, the contractor is to
reconstruct the fence in its original location. The grounds are to
1 be returned to their original contours and reseeded to re-establish
the ground cover. Other work as required to return the adjacent
property to its original condition shall be the responsibility of
the contractor.
' 2. Section 09905 PAINTING:
.
+j Pa_ ragraph 1.01 SCOPE: Add the following:
0. The existing lift station building exterior.
1 Paragraph 2.01 MATERIALS: Add the following:
F. MASONRY COATING
F Paint for masonry shall be Tnemec Series 52 Tnemec-crete or
approved equal. Paint shall be self-priming for masonry '
surfaces.
Paragraph 2.03 P2.03 PREPARATION OF NON-METAL SURFACES: Add the fol-
lowing:
A
A. GENERAL
All surfaces receiving finish shall be properly pr;.pared as
specified. Remove all loose accumulations of dust or dirt by
blowing clean with air or vacuuming or sweeping with a brush.
Where necessary, wash with detergent follr,,gd by rinsing with
clean water.
y
11
T . _ T r
I
l
High gloss on old paint film shall be roughened with steel
wool or sandpaper. Remove mildew with warm solution of 1/3
cup of trisodium phosphate and 112 cup bleach (Clorox). Rinse
with clean water.
Remove oil and grease from steel with mineral spirits. Wash
plaster and wood with Dexall Preparite.
B. SPECIAL PREPARATION
P-1 Wood - Surfaces shall be dry, Sand smooth and remove saw
cuts or rasp marks, Spot pine knots and sap streaks. Putty
all nail holes and cracks.
P-2 Steel, Solvent Cleaning SSPC-SP 1-63 - Remove oil, grease,
dirt, soil or contaminants by cleaning with solvent or steam.
P-3 Cinder Block - Remove dirt, loose or excess mortar and dry
thoroughly. Patch defects as necessary with latex concrete
mix.
1 P-4 Concrete and Stucco - Patch where necessary with latex
concrete. Remove loose dirt and dust. Apply concrete sealer
or masonry conditioner. {
Paragraph 3.01 SURFACES TO BE PAINTED: Add the following: i
B. NON-METAL SURFACES
All non-metal surfaces shall be given two coats of enamel
paint as specified in Paragraph 2.01 C. Preparation of
surfaces shall be in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.
3. Add the following section:
w ~I
02480 LANDSCAPING
1.00 GENERAL
l
The contractor will re-seed the entire area of the temporary
construction easement and install all turf necessary to re-
place that damaged by any operation covered by this contract
either by excavation on the slte, or by storage of equipment
or materials on the turf, or as a result of equipment or
rubbish around the site. +
A. TOP SOIL
i
Top soil removed by excavation under this contract may be
reused in new work. Additional top soil, if necessary, {
shall be from an approved source and shall be free of
weeds, nut grass, trash and debris.
~r l
I
2 • 1
I
B. COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER
All fertilizers must conform to all applicable state
5 fertilizer laws, is to be delivered in original, unopened
containers, and most be uniform in composition, dry, and
free flowing. A complete fertilizer with a Nitrogen-
] } Phosphorus- Potash analysis of 10-10-5 and 33-00 is to be
} used in all grass areas.
C. PEAT MOSS
Horticulture grade Canadian stock, fibrous type which is
low in wood content, having a moisture content of not
more than 30%,
D. GRASS SEED
Hulled, extra fancy grade, fungicide treated Surmuda
having germination and purity content not less than 85%
(purity % x germination % + sound seal harvested
j within one year and shall be free of Johnson grass or
j other weeds.
E. GRASS SOD
Hydromulch Fiber; Virgin wood cellulose fiber, con-
q taim ng no germination; Conweed Hydromulch 2000 fiber, or
equal, having the following properties;
Moisture Content 10.0% t 3.0%
Wood Fiber Content 96.2% t 0.8%
Tackifier 3.0% t 0.5% ,
pH 4.8% t 0,5%
I
3,00 EXECUTION i
r 3.01 PLANTING SEASONS
Lawns shall be planted from May 1 to September 1. The pre-
paration of lawn and planting areas may begin prior to the
} specified planting season provided the subgrade has been
established and finish grading completed, and lawns can be {
protected from construction traffic.
3,02 PREPARATION FOR TURF PLANTING
All areas to receive turf shall be prepared prior to planting.
i Six inches of topsoil shall be distributed over the entire
{ site. Add peat moss at the rate of 100-150 pounds per 1,000
square feet, mixed with top 3" of topsoil. Scarify the top
eight inches by means of plows and disc harrows, or in small
areas by rototillers. Remove all large sticks, roots, stones,
debris or other objectionable material. Mix in 10-10-5 fer-
tilizer at the rate of twenty pounds per 100 square feet,
s
i.
3.
i
T-,_
1
Level soil b•, means of steel matt drags, tiller rakes, and
hand raking as required to eliminate bumps, ridges and de-
pressions,
3.03 HYDRO-MULCHING (OPTIONAL)
Hydro-mulching shall be accomplished by skilled workmen,
l experienced in this process, using approved equipment, such as
I 1 a Bowie Hydro-Mulcher• Planting mixture shall be applied by
3 means of a high pressure pump to the planting area. Slurry
shall be adjusted to produce a mixture of the turf consisting
{ of 40 pounds fiber, 20 pounds fertilizer and 2.0 pounds of
seed per 1,000 square feet of turf,
At the end of a three (3) week period after hydro-mulching is
complete, apply a uniform distributed covering of 33-0-0
fertilizer to all hydro-mulched grass area, applied at the
rate of 50 pounds per 10,000 square feet.
3.04 PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREES
Take adequate precautions to protect existing trees. If
necessary, wrap trunks of trees with 1 x 4 board x 4-6 feet
long. Wire temporarily in place until motorized operations
have been completed. Remove after work is complete. Do not
damage bank or break branches of existing trees,
3.05 MAINTENANCE
i
Contractor shall maintain all plants, trees and lawns during
all stages of construction and a minimum of sixty (60) days '
after all planting operations have been completed, regardless i
of the date of Owner's acceptance of the project.
J
Lawn shall be kept in a healthy growing condition by watering,
weeding, mowing, rolling, trimming, edging, and any other
necessary maintenance operations. At the end of the mainte-
nance period, all lawns shall have a solid turf, free of
weeds. Contractor shall replant as frequently as necessary to i
produce a close stand of grass over the entire lawn area.
Protect grass from insect festation, traffic or washinp•
3.06 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
At the completion of the maintenance period, the Owner shall
make a final inspection of the lawn. Lawns shall be healthy,
r growing, close stands; otherwise, shall be replanted as re-
quired to replace dead areas,
3.07 CIFAN-UP
l
Burlap, empty containers, rocks, clods and all other debris
must be removed daily and the site kept as tidy as possible at
all times. Any excess excavated subsoil or topsoil will be
I 4.
V
1
I
41
Placed where and as directed by the Contractor. After
planting operations are finished, all paved arses which a~ay
have become strewn
thoroughly cleaned with soil or other material will be
by sweeping and washing if necessary.
4. Section 11414 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS:
Paragraph 2 04 PUMP CONSTRUCTION: Add the following:
If bearing temperature switches and moisture sensing switches are +A
required as a normal part of equipment by the pump manufacturer,
they shall be provided. The final output of these functions shall
be a 120 VAC, 10 Amp contact, for pump control. All RTO relays and
auxiliary relays required to provide a 120 VAC, 10
contact, as shown on plan schematic, shall be provided byyAmp
theupump
supplier. RTD relays and auxiliary relays shall be placed in a
NEMA 0 enclosure with appropriate reset buttons and failure lights
mounted on the front. A11 equipment shall be pre-wired and tested
ready for field installation. Terminal strips for field wiring
shall be provided inside enclosure. Manufacturer control cable
shall be provided between pump and protective equipment enclosure.
Manufacturers cable shall be provided of sufficient length to
connect to appropriate starter in MCC.
r
ParaAr~ph 3.01 INSTALLATION: Add the following:
Contractor shall mount protective equipment enclosure outside of
motor control center as directed.
circuit, powered by the li htin Contractor shall provide -
' ment within this enclosure. Contra lc~tor to shal l t provi de control
3 wiring between enclosure and MCC, and connect manufacturers control
cable to enclosure terminal block, as well as connect pump power
cable to appropriate starter in MCC,
f
i Paragraph 2.05 MOTOR: Delete the following sentences in the first
j paragraph:
"The motor shaft shall be stainless steel." "At the design point,
I the motor shall not draw more than 156A at nominal voltage at
f utility supply quality."
Delete the third paragraph.
i
Pa_ raUraph 2.06 SLIDING CouailNG SYSTEM:
t The ramp body and slide coupling mating faces shall be cast iron.
Paragraph 2.07 ACCESS FRAME AMD GUIDES:
The Contractor shall also furnish and instal frames, complete with hinged and hasp-equippedlcoverin two supper
guide holders and chain holders and one cable holder.
5.
5, Section 16150 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT:
Para rah 2.01 MATERIALS: Delete the paragraph on "Latching
e ays.
} PLANS
1, Sheet 1 and 2: Change the locations and direction of influent
pipes to the lift station as shown in attached Figure 2.
2. Sheet 5: Change electrical plans to add contactors in the Motor
Control Center as shown in attached Figure 3.
Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the space provided
in the Proposal.
December 6, 1984
FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. i
f
i
w
~i
1 I
t
a
I
1
i
i
6
a
1
a
hlo Sca/c JJ
1
1f -14
- - -
's RO,B S O N L19NE - - -
_Exid/inQ~Sidewa/k Q 1
NEW IiAr * - - x
srar/ON
Q
New 6'Qraval Rosd 7-0 O
~ LiFt StBfion ~ ~
I
c Limits Ot" remPorar I
V y ~ J
i Existing lift Constrvcllon Eksemanf i
Str/ion '300,
} /DO ~ oft
Consfrucf a lemoorary chain M7k Ance
bOween tha oxidfiny lift station site s►nd f/a I
adioo'ning pro,~ooariy to the ¢4,1t tvnd:lot✓Eh f`or ><i4e
durs/ion of fhe use or the itmporary Cansfruation
amsement, lance /s -o he reconatrvol-dd knits
onq,n el Iota/ion upon cor»Pletion OP fide pro/ect
- and Me are~n of Me 1"orar coed/rvot.on
LIFT smrlow 4eacsg Apo,40 easemant is ro bo reseaded
adrtlurnad >`o
a //s or,rginol Condition v,oon Cong010ion of
i tha p%iact.
I~I /lddendu~n No. !
1 F1~ur'e 1 i I
AeGernber 31
14$1 1
I ;
S1
I
1
f
t
S
a
~ ~ C/ra a Pike L a'o/ic»
&II/irlq !W// OI os shown.
r AA% B/ind f~nyd~Q ,
Oar ` r'. ! 1 /7 •Sti
Ie•eJ~b~
rtiA:;. , oaf Br~
a at r~ o
'CFO '
~d
~ 2tar
C Po* LACC//o!1 T IO`AI• (TAs lb Exitfl
of own. ico r/ IG`16roe Ah/i7)
1
Piyule 2
AacNnb/r J, &.04
1
1
l ~
i
490 VAC l
120 VAC
r 9eoring romp. and
moisture Relay Contacts Motor Winding
In Motor Protective gear. romp,
J H
APR 0 30LS
r r R rR I
A
O r r
M
F
ti
Alternator Contact Ot !
ai Level Carytto/ Pone
rRl
it
r. 0. E. , 0-3 Min., set
a/ 30 Sec. Intervals.
Ll
L 2 125 I
r i
L3 _
i
PFR
9
J
s ~
t
CONTROL SCNEMArIC FOR SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER
PUMP NO. l B 2 {
Addendum No l
F/gure 3 ryprcal For Wastewater ,pump No. J1
December 3, 199'4
i.
1
INVITATION FOR BIDS
Sealed proposals addressed to the City of Denton, Texas, Purchasing /
Department, 9016 Texas Street, will be received at the office of the
Purchasing Agent until 2:00 P.M,, December 11, 1984 for the construction
of the following item:
HOBSON LANE LIFT STATION
At this time and place the proposals will be publicly opened and read
aloud. Any bid received after closing time will be returned unopened.
Contract Documents, including Plans and Specifications, are on file and may
be examined without charge in the office of the Purchasing Agent or the
Utilities Department, 901 Texas Street, Denton, Ttaxas, and the offices of
Freese and Nichols, Inc,, Consulting Engineers, 811 Lamar Street, Fort
North, Texas 76102, Telephone (817) 336-7161, Contract documents,
including plans and specifications may be procured from Freese and Nichol
Inc., at the above address as follows: s,
Cost: $25.00 per set Non-Refundable
A cashier's check, certified check or acceptable bidder's bond, payable
to the City of Denton in an amount not less than five (5%) percent
of the bid submitted, must accompany each bid as a guarantee that, if
awarded the contract, the Bidder will within fifteen (15) days after
receipt of Notice of Award, enter into a contract and execute bonds on
the forms provided in the Contract Documents.
1
l Attention is called to the fact that not less than the prevailing wage
rates, as established by the Owner and as hereinafter set forth in We
Contract Documents hereinbefore described and which are made a part
hereof, must be paid on this project.
Performance and Payment Bonds will be required,
I In case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating
City of Denton reserves the right to adopt the mostadvantageousiconstruc-
tion thereof, or to reject any or all bids, and waive formalities.
may be withdrawn within thirty (30) days after date on which bids areo bid
opened,
CITY OF DENTON, TEXAS
John J. Marshall, C,p,},l,
Purchasing Agent
1 .
} UUUIO-1
t
s INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. Defined Terms. Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which
are die nec n1Fie General Conditions of the Agreement have the meanings
assigned to them in the General Conditions.
2. Qualification of Bidders. To demonstrate his qualifications for
the Pro ec eac er mus be prepared to submit within five (5) days
of owner's requast written data as to the Bidder's Qualifications such
as financial data, previous experience, list of available equipment, and
evidence of authority to conduct business in the jurisdiction where the
project is located.
3. Examination of Contract Documents and Site.
3.1 Before submitting his Bid, each Bidder must (a) examine the
Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to fami-
liarize himself with local conditions that may in any manner
affect performance of the work, (c) familiarize himself with
+ federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regula-
tions affecting performance of the work, and (d) carefully
correlate his observations with the requirements of the #
Contract Documents.
3.2 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible
representation by the Bidder that he has complied with every
requirement of this Article 3.
4. Interpretations. All questions about the meaning or intent of the
Contrac ocumen s s all be submitted to Engineer in writing. Replies
- b
will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by
~
Engineer as having received the bidding documents. Questions received
I less than two days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be
answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be
binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be
without legal effect. `
II
5. Bid Security.. Each bid must be accompanied by a certified or
cashie"r s check or an approved Bidder's Bond underwritten by a surety named
in the current list of "Surety Companies Acceptable on Federal Bonds" as
published in the Federal Register by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts,
U.S. Treasury Department, for tho sum of five (5%) percent of the amount of
the maximum total bid as a guarantee that, if awarded the contract, the
Bidder will promptly enter into a Contract and execute a Performance and
f Payment Bond on the forms included in the Contract Documents. Certified or
`f cashier's check shall be made payable to the Owner.
{ 5. Contract Time. The number of days for the completion of work (the
1 Contract TTmeT_is provided in the Bid (Proposal) and will be included 1n
the executed Agreement. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in
the Supplementary Conditions. It is the intent of the Owner that the lift
station be operable and substantially complete by June 1, 1985.
00100-1
i
J
7. Bid Form (Proposal).
7.1 Bidders shall use the Bid (Proposal) forms included in the
documents for each contract Bid. Bid (Proposal) forms are to
be left attached to documents in same manner as received by
Bidders. Supplemental data to be furnished shall be included
in same sealed envelope with Proposal.
I 7.2 Bid (Proposal) Forms must be completed in ink. The Bid price
of each item on the form must be stated in words, if speci-
fically requested, and/or numerals; in case of a conflict,
words will take precedence.
7.3 Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by
the president or a vice-president (or other corporate officer
accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the cor-
porate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or i
an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of
incorporation shall be shown below the signature.
7.4 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name
and signed by a partner, his title must appear under his
signature and the official address of the partnership must be
shown below the signature.
7.5 All names most be printed below the signature.
7.6 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all
Addenda (the numbers of which shall be filled in on the Bid
Form).
8. Submission of Bids. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place
indicate n e nv ation for Bids and shall be included in an opaque
sealed envelope, marked with the Project title and name and address of
the Biddfr and accompanied by the Bid Security and other required
documents.
9. Modification and Withdrawal of Bids. Bids may be modified or
with rad` wn by an appropriate a ocumen duTy executed (in the manner that a
Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be
submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. Bids may not be
withdrawn after opening of Bids for the period set forth in the invi-
tation for Bids.
10. Opening ing of Bids. Bids will be opened as indicated in the invita-
tion or BfAs_~S9-s received after such time will not be considered,
and will be returned unopened.
11. Bids to Remain Open. All Bids shall remain open for the period of
time se obi in the Invitation for Bids, but Owner may, in his sole
discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to that
date.
00100-1
}
ti
v
J
Y
t 12. Award of Contract.
12.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids and waive
i any and all formalities, and the right to disregard all
nonconforming or conditional Bids or counter proposals.
12.2 In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider the qualifications of
the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the pre-
scribed requirements, and alternates and unit prices if
requested in the Bid forms, He may consider the qualifica-
tions and experience of Subcontractors and other persons and
organizations (including those who are to furnish the princi-
pal items of material or equipment) proposed for those por-
tions of the work as to which the identity of Subcontractors
and other persons and organizations must be submitted as
specified in the Supplementary Conditions or Specifications.
he may conduct such investigations as he deems necessary to
establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial
ability of the Bidders, proposed Subcontractors and other
persons and organizations to do the work in accordance with i
I the Contract Documents to Owner's satisfaction within the
prescribed time. Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid
of any Bidder who does not meet any such evaluation to Owner's
lid satisfaction.
12.3 If a contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the
lowest responsible Bidder whose evaluation by owner indicates
to the Owner that the award will be in the best interests of
the project.
12.4 It is expected that the Owner's evaluation of bids and award
of contract will be made as set forth in the Invitation for
Bids. The successful bidder will be notified by a Notice of
Award which may be a letter or telegram. Time of completion
is very important and failure to meet completion schedule will
subject ofmthes Coas provided ntract. in
the
13. Execution of Contract.
13.1 The accepted Bidder, within fifteen (15) days aft'r formal
notice of award, shall execute the formal Contract Agreement
and required Bonds on the forms prepared and submitted by the
Owner.
13.2 The Owner will issue a Notice to Proceed authorizing the
Contractor to commence work.
14. Wage Rates. There shall be paid on the project not less than the
general prev`aMing rates of wages in the locality of the project, which
prevailing wage rates have been determined by the Owner in accordance with
00100-3
1
1
i•
l
Tom: - ~T>"1lr r ♦ ~ T - - - - - T - ~ - - - - _ -T.
y
Fa , l~
statutory requirements. There is included in the Supplementary Conditions,
a schedule giving, for various classifications, the minimum rates as have
been established by the Owner.
i
15. Sales Taxes. The Owner qualifies as an exempt agency pursuant to {
the prov s ons of Article 20.04 (F) of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise
and Use Tax Act, and is not subject to any State or City sales taxes.
The Contractor performing this contract may purchase, rent or lease all
materials, supplies, equipment used or consumed in the performance of 1
" this contract by issuing to his supplier an exemption certificate in 1
lieu of the tax, said exemption certificate complying with the State
Comptroller's ruling #95-0.07. Any such exemption certificate issued by
the Contractor in lieu of the tax shall be subject to the provisions of
the State Comptroller's ruling #95-0.09 as amended to be effective
October 2, 1968. E
16. Performance and Payment Bonds. Performance and Payment Bonds are I
require obis project an s a be provided in accordance with Article
5 of the General Conditions.
A
END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS j
1
j
t.
I
00100-4
BID
PROPOSAL
Denton , Texas
December 11 , 19 84
PROPOSAL Of Wei zul Construction, In-c, ,
1
A Corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Hawaii ,
a partnership consisting of ,
Ir the business name of an individual.
TO: City of Denton, Texas
PROPOSAL FOR: Hobson Lane Lift Station
The undersigned Bidder
, pursuant to the foregoing Invitation for Bids,
has carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, this Proposal, the
Supplemental Conditions, the form of Contract Agreement and Bonds, the
General Conditions of the Agreement, the Specifications, the Plans, and
also the site of the work, and will provide all necessary labor, super-
intendence, machinery, equipment, tools, materials, services and other
facilities to complete fully all the work as provided in the Contract
Documents; and binds himself upon formal acceptance of his Proposal to
execute a contract, and bonds, according to the prescribed forms, for the
following prices to-wit:
Unit Extended '
a Item Description Price Amount
1. Construction of Hobson Lane Lift
Station, complete as shown on the ; I
Plans and specified herein, the
lump sum of
Two hundred Eighteen
Thousand Five hundred Dollars L.S. $218,500.00
Within fifteen (15) days after formal acceptance of this Proposal by a
Notice of Award of contract, the undersigned will execute the Contract ;
Agreement and will furnish approved surety bonds and such other bonds as
required by the Contract Documents for the faithful performance of the
Contract. In the event the Contract Agreement and bonds are not exe-
cuted within the time above set forth, the attached bid security in the
amount of
5% of Greatest Amount Bid
00300-1
i
I
is to become the property of the owner as liquidated damageC )r the
delay and additional work caused thereby.
The undersigned agrees to substantially complete all work covered by
these Contract Documents within 180 consecutive calendar days from the
a day established for the start of the work as set forth in a written
Notice to Proceed to be issued by the Owner or by the Engineer for the
Owner. Except by mutual agreement of the Owner and the Contractor, the
date established for the start of work will be not less than ten (10)
days or not more than thirty (30) days after the date of the Contract
Agreement.
Receipt is acknowledged of the following addenda:
Addendum No. 1 December 11, 1984
Addendum No. 2
Addendum No. 3
Addendum No. 4
Addendum No. 5
Respectfully submitted, 1
J
tnr Attested By:
ame an e
11544 S temmnn s Er~c-- jiaa
ecre ary )
ress ~ ~
(SEAL) If Bidder is a Corporation
NOTE: Do not detach bid forms from other papers. Fill in with ink and
submit complete with attached papers.
i
M
1
00300-2
,
NOTICE OF AWARD
TO: Weitzul Construction, Inc.
i
PROJECT DESCRIPTION; ^City of Denton exa .
Hobson Lane Lift Station _ - 1
The OWNER has considered the BID submitted by you for the ee above
~ 1L~
described WORK in response to its Advertisement for Bids dated
19 84 , and information for Bidders.
_ You are hereby notified that your BID has been accepted for items in
the amount of $ 218,500.00
You are required by the Information to Bidders to execute the
' Agreement and furnish the required Contractor's Performance Bond and
Payment Bond within ten calendar days from the date of this Notice to you. a
If you fail to execute said Agreement and to furnish said bonds within 4
ten days from the date of this Notice, said OWNER will be entitled to con- {
sider all your rights arising out of the OWNER'S acceptance of your BID as
abandoned and as a forfeiture of your Bid Bond. The OWNER will be entitled
to such other rights as may be granted by law.
You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this NOTICE OF
AWARD to the OWNER. i
Dated this 11 day of _Ian ar _ 19 gry. 1
By _ 4 )
Title _
ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE }
Receipt of the above NOTICE OF AWARD is hereby ackn lodged
by W~ITANL_ N.s1eqEI/o1L_iW - I ~
s he Al day of 19 us.
' / •J
B _
Title 4"01 n
i
END NOTICE OF AWARD
NW-1
V
1•
l
i
NOTICE TO PROCEED
To: Weitzul_Construction,_L1c.Date:
_januarv 11• Isa5
_ Project: CQ~n Texas
Hgbson ] 11Q_Lift Station 1
You are i!ereby notified to commence work in accordance with the Agree-
' ti
ment dated 19_, on or before 19
and you are to complete the work within consecutive calendar days
thereafter. The date of completion of all WORK is therefore June 1 ti
19_85 s
er
BY
Title r,
ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE g
Receipt of the above NOTICE TO
E
PROCEED is hereby acknowledged by
i
1J49Jt. Mt tW7X#4r14PA1 ZNNi f
this the day I
of (0119 dS
Y
N
Title id--aE u~iwE7N~
O
NOTICE TO PROCEED
s
f
1
1
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
STATE OF TEXAS
a COUNTY Of - Denton
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this day Of-January
A.D., 19 85, by and between The City of Denton
of the County of _Denton and State of Texas, acting through its
_ City Manager _ --.-thereunto duly authorized so to do,
1
Party of the First Part, hereinafter termed the OWNER, and
,
Weitzui Construction, Inc.
of the City of Dallas County of ^-Dallas
and State of Texas Party of the Second Part, hereinafter
termed CONTRACTOR.
k WITNESSETH; That for and in consideration of the payments and
agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the Party of
the First Part (OWNER), and under the conditions expressed in the bonds
bearing even date herewith, the said Party of the Second Part (CONTRACTOR)
hereby agrees with the said Party of the First Part (OWNER) to commence
and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows;
--City of Denton
i
and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in
the General Conditions of the Agreement; and at his (or their) own proper i
cost and expense to furnish all the materials, supplles, machinery, equip-
ment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and other accessories and
services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with
the conditions and prices stated in the Proposal attached hereto, and in
accordance with all the General Conditions of the Agreement, the Special
Conditions, the Notice to Bidders (Advertisement for Bids), Instructions
1
I
10-15-71
'78
3
to Bidders, and the Performance and Payment Bonds, all attached hereto,
and in accordance with the plans, which includes all maps, plats, blue-
prints., and other drawings and printed or written explanatory matter
thereof, and the Specifications therefor, as prepared by FREESE AND
NICHOLS, INC., herein entitled the ENGINEER, each of which has been identi-
fied by the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER, all of which are made a part
hereof and collectively evidence and constitute the entire contract.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work on or after the
date established for the start of work as set forth in a written notice
to commence work and to substantially complete all work within the time
stated in the Proposal, subject to such extensions of time as are pro-
vided by the General and Special Conditions.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds the
price or prices shown in the Proposal, which forms a part of this Con-
tract, such payments to be subject to the General and Special Conditions
of the Contract.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed
this Agreement in the year and day first above written.
ATTEST:
1
City of Denton, Texas j
Party f he t Pa 0 £4T R
t
_ BY
G. CIris Hartu g
City Manager
(SEAL)
i
ATTEST,
i
~Rlirltl Weitzul Construction, Inc.
Party of the Seco^nc~Part, CONTRACTOR i
By
T t e
(SEAL)
2
10/22/73
'7B
ti
v
I
>o!J{~
PERFORMANCE BOND
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF Denton
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS; That Weitzel Construction, Inc.
of the City of Dallas
County of - Dallas and State of Texas
' as PRINCIPAL, and United Pacific Insurance Co.
Federal Way, 11A as SURETY,
authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds
for principals, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Denton,
Texas as OWNER, in the penal sum of Two Hundred
Eighteen Thousand Five Hundred Dollars ($218,500,00 )
for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and
their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly
and severally, by these presents;
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract
with the OWNER, dated the day of j_an!ar 19 for the cone
struction of
I
City of Dem. Texas
Hobson LaneLift Station
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to
the same extent as if copied at length herein,
NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such, that if
the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract and shall in all
respects duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the cove-
nants, conditions and agreements in and by said contract agreed and cove-
nanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, and according to the f
true intent and .r.,.:aning of said Contract and the Plans and Specifications
hereto annexed, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise to remain
i in full force and effect;
f
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the
provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended
f 3
10-15-71
• 178
1
I 1
COMPLAINT NOTICE---TEXAS 1
SHOULD ANY DISPUTE ARISE ABOUT YOUR
CONTACT PREMIUM ~ F AGENT OR WRITE TO TI HIF 14AVE FILED.
COMPANY
THAT ISSUED THE POLICY, BOND OR CERTIFICATE. IF
THE PROBLEM IS NOT RESOLVED, YOU MAY ALSO
WRITE THE STATE DOARD OF INSURANCE, DEPART.
MENT C, 1110 SAN JACINTO, AUSTIN, TEXAS 78786
THIS NOTICE OF COMPLAINT PROCEDURE IS FOR IN~
FORMATION ONLY AND DOES NOT 13ECOME A PART OR
CONDI'T'ION OF THIS POLICY, BONI) OR CURfT 'ICATE.
GU256 UNIT OfIM Prt11l tl rcfi a i,UYPI v UIV.
r,Ir
1
q
Ji
1
i
by acts of the 56th Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, and all liabilities J
on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said
Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed upon this
bond, venue shall lie in _Denton_____ County, State of Texas.
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change,
extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or
to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings
i accompanying the same, shall in anywise affect its obligation on this bond,
and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alter-
ation or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be per-
formed thereunder,
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and "
sealed this instrument this day of January 14 85 a
Weitzul Construction, 1 v_UNITED PACIFIC INSUUN(E COMPANY
Pr3 c .pal. e'ty I
By -
John N. Bustard
Title Presi 1 _Attuu,ayTi,,.PcsGl _
Address 11500 S ressu&.._ w
#108 1164 F3iehqpSt., Suite 1710
HewnU $8813
Dallas, TX 5 - "iL.U.BILW41
- - ` /
(SEAL) (SEAL)
~ 1
I
The name and address of the Resident Agent of Surety is,
35D _ P.r ~t a < <i
NOTE; Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract,
.
t
4
10-15-71
,78
r
!
4
/
rt
STATE OF HAWAII' )
)SS.
I CITY S COUNTY OF HONOLULU)
On this 2401 day of January , A.O., ]535, before me „
pe-.3onally appeared John N. Bustard , to me personally known, .
who being by me duly sworn did say that he is the attorney-in-fact for _
United Pacific Insurance Company duly appointed
under Power of Attorney dated the 25th day of June , 1981 ,
which said Power of Attorney is now in full force and effect; and that the
foregoing instrument was executed in the name and behalf of said
-United Pacific Insurance Company _ by said John N.-BuslaaiT-
as its attorney-in-fact; and said John N`-' Isuctard
acknowledged said instrument to be the free act and
deed of United Pacific Insurance Company
Cary Pu lic, State of Hawaii J
My commission expires 12/1.7/87
f
h
' y
I
PAYMENT BOND
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF---V-ent9ft-
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS; That Weitzul Construction. Inc.
of the City of Dallas
County of Dallas as and State of Texas
as PRINCIPAL, and _ United Pacific Insurance
Federal 4Jay, 4lA as SURETY, authorized under the laws of the State of
Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound
unto the City of Denton, Texas - '
as OWNER, in the penal sum of Two Hundred Einhteen thousand five
Hundred _ Dollars 218.600,00 for the payment whereof,
executorsPrsuccp- a . andrassigns, jointlyvandaseverally, bystheseipresentsrs,
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract
with the Owner, dated the 16 day of January 19 85 , for the construction
of City of Denton, Texas
_ Robson Lane Lift Station '
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to ,
the same extent as if copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that
if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material
to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in
said contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in
full force and effect,,
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the
provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended
1959, and all liabilities
by acts of the 56th Legislature, Regular Session,
on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said A
Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein,
PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed upon this
bond, venue shall lie in _DQntnu__._
5
10-15-71
X78
i
r
t
r
ti
1
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change,
extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or
to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications or drawings
accompanying the same, shall in anywise affect its obligation on this bond,
and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, - ,
alteration or addition to the teens of the contract, or to the work to be
performed thereunder.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and
sealed this instrument this _ 16 day of January 19. 85
We1tzu1 Construction, Inc. United Pacific Insuraaoce Co.
PrjncipaT ~v Surety
John N. Bustard
Title_ _ President. Altarney ink±uct
_
Address 11500 Ste ss a_t&
ffie;
in oB > l e4 ala,op s~., rauhe t n o
Honolulu, He"I 88819
Dallas, TX 157
' - Ph.NE914333
(SEAL) (SEAL.)
The name and address -f the Resident Agent of Surety is:
~~~~~~~~,1~ f~a✓G•-~ "r-. l~c,t}__r~~~e_~C.,a_c n r c c , ~ i
o Note, Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract. i
j
f
6
10-15-71
78
j
' V
V
I
I
I
I
1
f
4
r
STATE OF HAWAII
)SS.
CITY 6 COUNTY OF HONOLULU)
On this _24th day of January , A.D., 1985, before me
personally appeared john N. Bustard , to me personally known,
who being by me duly sworn did say that he is the attorney-in-fact for _
_ Unitt.d_P!Ieific Insurance Com an _______.__duly appointed
under Power of Attorney dated the 25th day of June , 7.9 810
which said Power of Attorney is now in Eu11 force and effect; and that the
foregoing instrument was executed in the name and behalf of said
nixed P..tciElc Insurance Company by said John N. Bustard
ae its attorney-in--facts and said Jo1in_ N. BustarT 1
_acknowledged said instrument to be the free act and
deed of United Paci.fic_Insurance Comp ry
It y Pubic, State of Hawaii
My commission expires 12/1.7/87
l
LJ LV l' L' l e.11 ~'F'.L:J kr'~L% J. iV .Is U t't" INJ Lim J.LVls r l i V JL
HOME OFFICE, FEDERAL WAY, WASHINGTON '
POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That the UNITED PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY,, coipor►tionduty orgvniaedunder thetawsolthe
State 01 Washington, don hereby rruke, constitute end oppoinl -
11. C. KING, or EVELYN S. HIRAI, or JOHN 14, DUSTARD, or PAUL R. BOT`PS, or .
JACK S. 411LNOTllsor LAWRENCE 1.1, CARLSTROM of 11ONOLUC,U) HAWAII------------
its true and lawful Attoineyln•Fact, to make, execute, seaf and deliver la and on Its behalf, and as Its aal and deed
ANY AND ALL DONDS AND UNDERTAKINGS OF SURETYSHIP-----
and toNmd she UNITED PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds and undrrtakingsandother wntingt
y obligatory in the nature thereof were signed by an Executive Ollicar of the UNITED PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY and sealed and attested by one
other of such officers, and hereby ratifiesand confirms all that Its said Atlomeyls),In Foct may do in pursuance hereof.
This Power of Atiorory It granted under and by authority of Article Vii of the ByL.ws'af VN1TC0 PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY which
' bume effective September 7, 1979, which provisions are now in full force and effect, trodi, q at follow
ARTICLE VII EXECUTION OF 8ONDS ANG I-1•;0ERTAKiN0S
1. The board of Directors, the President, the Chairman of the Board, any Senior Vv:r Pressrfent. Pay Vice President or Arrlstant Vice President
or other officer designated by the Board of Directors shall have power and authority to tai appoint Aimmeys•In•Fact an:t toaulhorize them 10 execute
on behalf of the Company, bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and Ibl
to remove any such Attorneyln.Faet at any time and revoke the power and authority given to hires. -
2. Attorneys3n-fact shall have power and authority, sub)ect to The terms end limllations of the power of attorney Issued to them, to exeeule
ancidehver on behalf of the.Company, bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of Indemnify and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof.
The corporate seal is not necessary for the validity of any bonds and undertaking., recognizances, contracts of Indemnify and other writings obligim'e
1n the nature thereof,
r 3, Aitorneys•In•Fact shall have power and authority to execute Affidavits required to t,- attached to bonds, recognizances, contracts of indem'
pity or other conditional or obligatory undertakings and they shall also have power and authority to certify the finandol statement of the Company, and
to copies of the By-Lawsof the Company or any article or section thereof, t
This power of attorney Is signed and seated by facsimile under and by authority of the following Rcsotutmn adopted by the Doord of Directors of I
UNITED PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY ate meeting held on the 51h day of June. 197D. at which s quorum was present, and told Rtsolution has nor
been amended or repealed:
"Resolved, that the signatures of such directors and officers and the seal of the Coropony may be affixed to any such power of ,
altorney or any certificate totaling thereto by facsimile, and any such power of alfomey or certificate bearing such facsimile e
signotures or facsimffe seal shall be valid and bindinq upon she Company and any such power so execuled and certified by
[l locsindle signatures and facsimile scat shall be valid and bindiflg upon the Company In the future with eesp=et to any bond or
undertaking to which it Is attached."
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the UNITED PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its Vice Presldent, and tit corporate
seal to be hereto affixed, this 25th day of June 19 81.
UNSTE~O P~ACIFfI~C INSU ANCE OMPANY
n~`41
"pSW~Hti1
%~r^°'^
i
a
Vice President
STATE OF Washington
COUNTY OF King f
on this 25th day of June .1981, personaNy, appeared Charles 13. Schmalz
1o me known to be the Vice-President of the UNITED PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, and acknowledged that he executed and attested the lore.
peing Instrument and offla e6 the Mal of pid corporation thereto, and that Article Vil, Section 1, 2, and 3 of the By-Laws of said Company, and the
Rewlutlon, sot forth therein, are still in full force.
61,
Par Commission Explrei: -4~L
rrslr,,1
Juno 12 1g 82 Notary Public in and for St to of Washl ne ton
Residing at Tacoma
I, Charles J. FalskoW Assbroni Secretary of the UNITED PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby cerhly that the
above ►nd fnrrpaMg It a true and correct copy of a Power of Attomey executed by sold UNITED PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, which Is still on full
`I force and effect.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my bond and affixed the $eal of sold Company this 16th allay of JnnUary t9 85
Q~At Assist,ntSecrererybPU•1431 Ed, 4180 I
I
i I
1
00700-GENERAL CONDITIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS i
j
Article 1 - DEFINITIONS GC-1
Article 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS GC-3
2.1 - Execution of Agreement GC-4
2,2 - Delivery of Bonds GC-4
2.3 - Copies of Documents
GC-4
2.4 - Contractor's Pre-start Representations GC-4
2,5 - Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to Proceed GC-4
2.6 - Starting the Project GC-4
k=' 2.7 - Before Starting Construction GC-5
Article 3 - CORRELATION, INTERPRETATION AND INTENT OF
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS GC-5 t
Article 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; PHYSICAL CONDITIONS: 1
REFERENCE POINTS GC-6
4,1 - Availability of Lands GC-6
4,2 - Physical Conditions - Surveys and Reports GC-6
4.3 - Unforseen Physical Conditions GC-6
4.4 - Reference Points GC-6 !
Article 5 - BONDS AND INSUF NCE GC-7
5.1 - 5.2 - Performan=:, Payment and Other Bonds GC-7
5,3 - Contractor's Insurance Requirements ' GC-7 '
5.4 - Additional Bonds and Insurance GC-8
Article b - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES GC-8
6.1 - 6.2 - Supervision and Superintendence GC_8
6.3 - 6.6 - Labor, Materials and Equipment GC-9
6.7 - Substitute Materials or Equipment GC_9
6.8 - 6.11 - Concerning Sub-contractors GC-10
6.12 - 6,13 - Patent Fees and Royalties GC-10
6.14 - Laws and Regulations GC_11
6,15 - Taxes i
6.16 - 6,17 - Use of Premises GC-11
GC-11
6.18 - Record Drawings GC-11
6.19 - Safety and Protection GC-12
6.20 - Emergencies GC-12 ! i
6-21 - 6,26 - Shop Drawings and Samples GC-13
6.27 - Cleaning GC-14
6.28 - 6.29 - indemnification GC-14
Article 7 - WORK BY OTHERS GC-15
Article 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES GC-15
Article 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION GC-16
9.1 - Owners Representative GC-16
9.2 - Visits to Site GC-16
' 9.3 - Clarifications and Interpretations
9.4 - Rejecting Defective Work GC-17
f 9.5 - 9.7 - Shop Drawings, Change O,ders and Payments GC-17
r .
TC-1
I
1'
ik
9.8 - Resident Project Representatives
9.9 - 9.10 - Decisions on Disagreements GC-17
9.11 - 9.13 - Limitations On Engineer's Responsibilities GC-18
Article 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK f
Article 11 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE. GC-19
Article 12 -CHANGE. OF CONTRACT TIME GC-19
Article 13 - WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE; TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; GC-20
CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE
13.1 - Warranty and Guarantee GC-21 f
13.2 - 13.4 - Tests and Inspections GC-21
13.5 - Access to Work GC-21
13.6 - 13.7 - Uncovering Work GC-22
13,8 - Owner May Stop Work GC22
13.9 - Correction or Removal of Defective Work GC-23 !
13.10 - Cite Year Correction Period GC-23
13,11 - Acceptance of Defective Work GC-23
13.12 - Neglected Work by Contractor GC-24 !I 1
Article 14 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION GC-24
14.1 - Schedules GC-24
14.2 - Application for Progress Payments GC-24
14,3 - Contractor's Warranty of Title GC-24
14.4 - 14.6 - Approval of Payments GC-25
14,7 - 14.8 - Substantial Completion GC-25
14.9 - Partial Utilization GC-26
14,10 - Final Inspection GC-27
14.11 - Final Application for Payment GC-28
14.12 - 14.13 - Approval of Final Payment GC-28
14.14 - Contractor s Continuing Obligation GC-28
14.15 - Waiver of Claims GC-29
0
29
Article 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION GC-
15.1 - Owner May Suspend Work GC-30
15.2 - 15,4 - Owner May Terminate GC-30
15.5 - Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate GC-31
Article 16 - ARBITRATION GC-31
Article 17 - MISCELLANEOUS GC-31
17.1 - Giving Notice GC-32
17.2 - Computation of Time GC-32
17.3 - 17.5 - General GC-32
GC-3?.
i
3
ti TC-2
y
1I,
I
GENERAL CuNDITIONS
ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS
Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other Contract
Documents, the following terms have the meanings indicated which are
applicable to both the singular and plural thereof;
` Addendum (Addenda) - A supplement to the Contract Documents issued in
li writing prior to the receipt of bids.
Agreement - The written Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering €
the Work to be performed.
Application for Payment - The form furnished by ENGINEER, which is to ~
a be used by CONTRACTOR io requesting progress payments and which is to
include the schedule of values required by paragraph 14.1 and an af-
fidavit of CONTRACTOR that progress payments theretofore received on
account of the Work have been applied by CONTRACTOR to discharge in
full all of CONTRACTOR's obligations reflected in prior Applications
for Payment and that all materials and work included in the application
for payment conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents,
Bid - The offer or proposal of the Bidder submitted on the prescribed
form setting forth the prices for the Work to be, performed, ,l
r 1
Bidder - Any person, firm or corporation submitting a Bid for the Work.
I
Bonds - Bid, performance, payment, maintenance bonds and other instru-
ments of security, furnished by CONTRACTOR and his surety in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
r Calendar Day - A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from mid- !
night to the next midnight and is any day of the week, no days being
excepted.
Contract Amendment - A written agreement signed by both parties altering
the terms of the General Conditions and/or the Supplementary Conditions, j
Change Order - A written order to CONTRACTOR signed by OWNER authorizing
an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the I
Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued after execution of the
Agreement.
Contract Documents - The Agreement, Addei,'e, Invitation for Bids, In-
structions to Bidders, CONTRACTOR's Bid, .e Bonds, the Notice of Award,
these General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Specifi-
cations, Drawings and Modifications.
i
F&N-78 GC-1
1
l
31 i
f
i
Contract Price - The total moneys payable to CONTRACTOR under the Contract
Documents.
Contract Time - The number of days stated in the Agreement for the com-
pletion of the Work, computed as provided in paragraph 17.2
CONTRACTOR - The person, firer or corporation with whom OWNER has executed
the Agreement.
[ Drawings - The drawings which show the character and scope of the Work J
to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by ENGINEER
and accepted by Owner and are referred to in the Contract Documents
except shop drawings as required by the Contract Documents.
ENGINEER - The person, firm or corporation named as such in the Agreement.
Field Order - A written order issued by ENGINEER which clarifies or
interprets the Contract Documents in accordance with paragraph 9.3 or ! 1
orders minor changes in the Work in accordance with paragraph 10.2.
Modification - (a) Contract Amendment; (b) Change Order; (c) Field Order.
Notice of Award - A written notice by 014NER to the apparent successful 1
Bidder stating that upon compliance with the conditions precedent to
be fulfilled by him within the time specified, OWNER will execute and
deliver the Agreement to hire.
Notice to Proceed - A written notice given by OWNER to CONTRACTOR (with I
a copy to ENGINEER) fixing the date on which the Contract Time will
commence to run and on which CONTRACTOR shall start to perform his chli-
ga:-'ins under the Contract Documents.
OWNER - A public body or authority, corporation, association, partner-
ship, or individual for whom the Work is to be performed.
k Project - The entire construction to be performed as provided in the
Contract Documents.
Resident Project Representative - The authorized representative of ENGI-
NEER who is assigned to the Project site or any part thereof.
Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, brochures, schedules
and other data which are prepared by CONTRACTOR, a Subcontractor, manu-
facturer, supplier or distributor and which illustrate the equipment,
material or some portion of the Work.
i
F&N-74 GC-2
i.
1
A
r
i
I Specifications - Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting
of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction
systems, standards, procedures and workmanship as applied to the Work.
II Subcontractor - An individual, firm or corporation having a direct con-
tract with CONTRACTOR or with any other Subcontractor for the performance
of a part of the Work at the site,
Substantial Completion - Certification by ENGINEER that the construction f
of the Project or a specified part thereof is sufficiently completed,
in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Project or
specified part can be utilized for the purposes for which it was in-
tended pursuant to the provisions of Paragraph 14.7, 14.9; or if there
be no such certification, the date when final payment is due in ac-
cordance with Paragraph 14,12,
Supplementary Conditions - A portion of the Contract Documents which
modifies the General Conditions by making additions, clarifications
and/or deletions, In cases of conflict between the Supplementary
Conditions and the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions
shall have precedence over the General Conditions. j
Work - Any and all obligations, duties and responsibilities necessary {
to the successful completion of the Project assigned to or undertaken
by CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents, including all labor, materials,
equipment and other incidentals, and the furnishing thereof,
! Working Day - A day not including Saturdays, Sundays or any of the
following holidays; New Year, Washington's Birthday, Memorial Day,
Independence Day, Labor Day, Columbus Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving
Day and Christmas Day, in which weather or other conditions, not under I
the control of the CONTRACTOR, will permit construction of the principal
units of the work for a period of not less than seven (7) hours between
7:00 A.M. and 6;00 P.M.
ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS
Execution of Agreement;
2.1 The Agreement, Bonds and such other portions of the Contract
Documents as may be required will be executed and delivered by CON-
TRACTOR to OWNER within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the Notice
of Award, The Owner shall determine the number of counterparts required,
The OWNER will execute the counterparts. OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER
P&N-78 GC-3
i
1
shall each receive an executed counterpart of the Contract Documents
and additional conformed copies as required.
Delivery of Bonds:
2.2. When he delivers the executed Agreement to OWNER, CONTRACTOR
shall also deliver to OWNER such Bonds as he may be required to furnish
in accordance with paragraph 5.1 and 5.4.
Copies of Documents:
2.3. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten (10) copies (unless
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions) of the Contract
Documents as are reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work.
Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of re-
production.
i y
Contractor's Pre-Start Representatiors:
2.4. CONTRACTOR represents that he has familiarized himself with,
and assumes full responsibility for having familiarized himself with,
the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, locality, and
with all local conditions and federal, state and local laws, ordinances,
rules and regulations that may in any manner affect performance of the
Work, and represents that he has correlated his study and observations
with the requirements of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR also represents
that he has studied all surveys and investigation reports of subsurface
and latent physical conditions referred to in the Contract Documents
f and will make such additional surveys and investigations as he deems
necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents and that he has correlated
the results of all such data with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to Proceed:
2.5. The Contract Time will commence on, and include, the day following
the date established in the Notice to Proceed issued by Owner to Contractor.
Starting the Project: +
1 i
2,6. CONTRACTOR shall start to perform his obligations under the
Contract Documents on the date when the Contract Time commences to run. a
` No Work shall be done at the site prior to the date on which the Contract ,
Time commences to run.
r
F&N-78 GC-4
4
1
t
i
Before Starting Construction, %
2,7, Before undertaking the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully pertinent
study and compare the Contract Do[icable fieldhmeasurements. pertinent shall
figures shown thereon and all app 1
at once report in writing to ENGINEER any conflict, error or discrepancy
which he may discover,
Within ten (]0) days after delivery of the executed Agree- all
ENGI
for rrent CONTRACTOR starting and
completion dates of the various stages of the Work, and a preliminary
schedule of Shop Drawing submissions,
ih {
2.9. When CONTRACTOR insurances ashreg0uiredCTOR
r~~y shall furnish OWNER and and
by Article 5, After delivery of'e work executed the s
agite en a conference `
ences
CONTRACTOR, but before starting the nference
will be held top review the Drawings scheduless to ish processing
for handling Shop
Applications for Payment,
to the Poroject. Presentratnthenconferencegwill
between the parties as
be OWNER or his representative, ENGINEER, Resident Project Representatives,
CONTRACTOR and his Superintendent.
E 3 - CORRELATION, INTERPRETATION AND INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
ARTICLE I
3
t ifications and Drawings to de-
3,1. it is the intent of the Spec
scribe a complete Pro ThetCoontrrbe Constructed in act Documents comprisedtheeenwith tiretAgree-
Cortroct Documents be altered only by a
meet between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. They may
Modification, ;
3,2, The Contract Documents are co by all If what is calCONTRACTORled
finds
`f f for by one is as binding as if called for by i
a conflict, error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, he shall
ceeding ing 1t once and befo~caPnnably
l call it to ENGINEER's attention in writ
1 with the Work affected thereby. Any Work that may
be inferred from the Specifications or Drawings as notuIteisto
produce the intended result shall be supplied pme specifically aappliedrhaveoakwell-known technical orttoradermeaning +
i words which so pp
shall be deemed to refer to such recognized stand, s. '
I
I
I
I ~
F&N-78 GC-5
4
t
F,
i
V
i
r
I
ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; PHYSICAL. CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
Availability of Lands;
4.1. OWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract documents
and not later than the date when needed by CONTRACTOR, or such later
date as set forth in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the
Work is to be done, rights-of-way for access thereto, and such other
lands which are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR. Easements for
permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will
be obtained and paid for by OWNER, unless otherwise specified in the {
Contract Documents. If CONTRACTOR believes that any delay in OWNER's i
furnishing these lands or easements entitles him to an extension of
the Contract Time, he may make a claim therefor as provided in Article
12. CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto
that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage
of materials and equipment.
j Physical Conditions - Surveys and Reports;
4.2. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identi-
f1cation of those surveys and investigation reports of subsurface and
latent physical conditions at the Project site or otherwise affecting
"i performance of the Work which have been relied upon by ENGINEER in preparation
of the Drawings and Specifications. The data is for general information
and the OWNER and ENGINEER do not guarantee the accuracy.
Unforseen Physical Conditions; ,
4.3. CONTRACTOR shall, within three (3) days after discovery, notify
{ OWNER and ENGINEER in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions
at the site differing materially from those indicated in the Contract
Documents. ENGINEER will investigate those conditions and advise OWNER
In writing if further surveys or subsurface tests are necessary. Thereafter,
Owner shall obtain the necessary additional surveys and tests and furnish
copies to ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR. If ENGINEER finds that the results
" j of such surveys or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent
physical conditions which differ materially from those intended in the
Contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated
or discovered by CONTRACTOR through his efforts as represented pursuant
to Article 2.4 of these General Conditions, a Change Order may be issued
incorporating the necessary revisions.
Reference Points;
4.4. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys for construction to
establish reference points which in his judgment are necessary to enable
i
F&N-78 GC-6
I
~t.
i V
I
I
I
ii
i T
CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible
for surveying and laying out the Work (unless otherwise provided in
i the Supplementary Conditions), and shall protect and preserve the
! established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations
without the prior written approval of OWNER. He shall report to ENGINEER
whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation
because of necessary changes in grades or locations, CONTRACTOR shall
replace and accurately relocate all reference points so lost, destroyed
or moved,
ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE
Performance, Payment and Other Bonds:
I ! 1
5.1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and payment Bonds as
security for the faithful performance and payment of all his obligations
under the Contract Documents, These Bonds shall be in amounts at least
equal to the Contract Price, and (except as otherwise provided in the
Supplementary Conditions) in such form as set forth in the Contract
Documents and with such corporate sureties as are licensed to conduct i
business in the state where the Project is located and are named in ,
the current list of "Surety Companies Acceptable on Federal Bonds" as
published in the Federal Register by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, J
U. S. Treasury Department. The performance bond and payment bond shall
be extended to include the Correction Period set forth in Article 13.10.
5.2. If the surety on any Bond furnished by CONTRACTOR is declared
a bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated
in any state where any part of the Project is located is revoked, CONTRACTOR
shall within five (5) days thereafter substitute another Bond and surety,
both of which shall be acceptable to OWNER.
Contractor's Insurance Requirements:
} 5,3. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will
protect him from claims under workmen's compensation laws, disability
benefit laws or other similar employee benefit laws; from claims for
damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease,
or death of his employees, and claims insured by usual personal injury
liability coverage; from claims for damages because of bodily injury,
sickness or disease, or death of any person other than his employees
including claims insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;
and from claims for injury to or destruction of tangible property, in-
cluding loss of use resulting therefrom - any or all of which may arise
out of or result from CONTRACTOR's operations under the Contract Documents,
whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or anyone
i
I
1
F&N-78 GC-7
i
I
r
directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any
of them may be legally liable. This insurance shall include the specific
coverage and be written for not less than any limits of liability and
maximum deductibles specified in the Supplementary Conditions or required
by law, whichever is greater, shall include contractual liability insurance
and shall include OWNER and ENGINEER as additional insured parties,
The Contractor shall maintain such additional insurance as he may deem j
appropriate. With the execution of the Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall
file with OWNER and ENGINEER certificates of such insurance, acceptable
to OWNER; these certificates shall contain a provision that the cover-
age afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or materially
changed until at least fifteen (15) days' prior written notice has been j
given to OWNER and ENGINEER,
Additional Bonds and Insurance.
Y 5.4. Prior to delivery of the executed Agreement by OWNER to CON-
TRACTOR, OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish such other Bonds and ,
` such additional insurance, in such form and with such sureties or insurers
as OWNER may require. If such other Bonds or such other insurance are
specified by written instructions given prior to opening of Bids, the
premiums shall be paid by CONTRACTOR; if subsequent thereto, they shall
be paid by OWNER (except as otherwise provided in paragraph 6.7).
ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Supervision and Superintendence;
t 6.1, CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the Work efficiently
with his best skill and attention. He shall be solely responsible for
the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction
and safety at the site. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible to see
that the finished Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents,
CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and OWNER intend that CONTRACTOR shall be an independent
contractor and not the agent or employee of either OWNER or ENGINEER,
6.2. CONTRACTOR shall keep at the project site at all times during
its progress of the work a competent resident superintendent, who shall
r not be replaced without written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER except
r i under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be CONTRACTOR's
I representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf
of CONTRACTOR. All communications given to the superintendent shall
be as binding as if given to CONTRACTOR.
i
M-78 GC-8
i
I
1A
1
t
i Labor, Materials and Equipment;
-
6.3. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably qualified person
r nel to survey and lay out the Work and perfoni! construction as required
by the Contract Documents. He shall at all times maintain good disci-
pline and order at the site.
6,4. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials, equipment, labor,
transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, ap-
pliances, fuel, Pover, light, heat, telephone, water and sanitary
" facilities and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the
execution, testing, initial operation and completion of the Work.
I 6.5. All materials and equipment which is to be incorporated
r into the Project shall be new, except as otherwise provided in the !
Contract Documents. If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall furnish
satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equip-
ment,
6.6. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed,
connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with
the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator or pro-
cessors, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The
CONTRACTOR shall furnish the OWNER with four (4) sets of all operating
instructions, maintenance manuals and parts list for all mechanical
and electrical equipment furnished for the project,
Substitute Materials or Equipments
6.7, If the Specifications, law, ordinance or applicable rules j
or regulations permit CONTRACTOR to furnish or use a substitute that
is equal to any material or equipment specified, and if CONTRACTOR
wishes to furnish or use a proposed substitute, he shall, prior to
the conference called for by paragraph 2,9, make written application
to ENGINEER for approval of such a substitute certifying in writing
that the proposed substitute will perform adequately the functions
called for by the general design, be similar and of equal substance
to that specified and be suited to the same use and capable of per-
forming the same function as that specified; and identifying all vari-
ations of the proposed substiute from that specified and indicating
available maintenance service. No substitute shall be ordered or in-
stalled without the written approval of ENGINEER who will be the judge
of equality and many require CONTRACTOR to furnish such other data
about the proposed substitute as he considers pertinent. No substitute i
shall be ordered or installed without such performance guarantee and
bonds as OWNER may require which shall be furnished at CONTRACTOR's
! expense.
s!
I
FAN-7a GC-9 {
1
i
1
Concerning Subcontractors;
6.6. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor or other person
or organization (including those who are to furnish the principal items
of materials or equipment), whether initially or as a substitute, against
whom OWNER may have reasonable objection. Acceptance of any Subcontractor, s
other person or organization by OWNER shall not constitute a waiver of
any right of OWNER to reject defective Work or Work not in conformance
with the Contract Documents. If OWNER after due investigation has reasonable
objection to any Subcontractor, other person or organization proposed
r w'; by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall submit an acceptable substitute. CONTRACTOR
shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, other person or organization `
against whom he has reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall not without 1
the consent of OWNER make any substitution for any Subcontractor, other
person or organization who has been accepted by OWNER.
1
6.9. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for all acts and omis-
sions of his Subcontractors and of persons and organizations directly
or indirectly employed by them and of persons and organizations for whose
acts any of them may be liable to 'the same extent that he is responsible y
for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him. Nothing
in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship be-
tween OWNER or ENGINEER and any Subcontractor or other person or organization
having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR nor
shall it create any obli
on the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to pay or to see to the payment of anyation
moneys due any Subcontractor or other person or organization, except
as may otherwise be required by law. OWNER or ENGINEER may furnish to
any Subcontractor or other person or organization, to the extent practicable,
evidence of amounts paid to CONTRACTOR on account of specific Work done
in accordance with the schedule of values.
6.10. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the r
identifications of any Drawings shall not control CONTRACTOR in dividing
the Work among Subcontractors or delineating the Work to be performed
by any specific trade.
6.11. CONTRACTOR agrees to bind specifically every Subcontractor
to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for
the benefit of OWNER.
Patent Fees and Royalties;
E
6.12. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume
all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work and the
completed Project of any invention, design, process, product or device
which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others.
j M-78 GC-10
i
jj
y
i
l
i
CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER and ENGINEER and anyone
directly or indirectl,, employed by either of them from and against all
claims, damages, losses and expenses (including attorneys' fees) arising
out of any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the
use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation
in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device and
shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement
t of such rights.
r" 6,13. CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits
` and licenses and shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees
' necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at thei
time of his Bid. OWNER shall assist CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining
`s;1"' r such permits and licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all public utility charges.
Laws and Regulations; a
6.14. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all laws,
ordinances, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. If CONTRACTOR
Fr, t' observes that the Specifications or Drawings are at variance therewith,
3 he shall give ENGINEER prompt written nutice thereof, and any necessary
changes shall be adjusted by an appropriate Modification. If CONTRACTOR '
performs any Work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations,
,Y and without such notice to ENGINEER, he shall bear all costs arising I
„ therefrom.
Taxes;
6.15. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar
taxes required to be paid by him in accordance with the law of the place
where the Work is to be performed. i I
R Use of Premises;
6,16. CONTRACTOR shall confine his equipment:, the storage of materials
and equipment and the operations of his workmen to areas permitted by
law, ordinances, permits, or the requirements of the Contract Documents, '
and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with materials or equipment.
6.17. CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure
to be loaded with weights that will endanger the structure, nor shall
he subject any part of the Work to stresses or pressures that will endanger
it.
I
Record Drawings; '
6.18. CONTRACTOR shall keep one record copy of all Specifications, 1
Drawings, Addenda, Modifications, and Shop Drawings at the site in good
F&N-78 GC-ll
' V
k,
I
I
order and annotated to show all changes made during the construction
process. These shall be available to ENGINEER and shall be delivered
to him for OWNER upon completion of the Project. /
Safety and Protection:
6.19. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining I
and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with
the Work. He shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of,
and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury
or loss to:
6.19.1. all employees on the Project site and other persons
who may be affected thereby,
6,19.2. all the Work and all materials or equipment to be
incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, and
6.19.3. other property at the site or adjacent thereto,
including, but not limited to, trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pave-
ments, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal,
relocation or replacement in the course of construction.
i
~ CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations and orders of any public body having jurisdiction for the
safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury J
or loss. He shall erect and maintain, as required by the conditions j
and progress of the Work, all necessary safeguards for its safety and
protection. He shall notify owners of adjacent utilities when prosecution
of the Work may affect them. All damage, Injury or loss to any property
referred to in paragraph 6.19.2 or 6.19.3 fused, directly or indirectly,
in whole or in part, by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or anyone directly
or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any
of them may be liable, shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR's
duties and responsibilities for the safety and protection of the Work
shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and ENGINEER
has issued a notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph
14.12 that Work is acceptable. i
Emergencies:
6.20. In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property,
the CONTRACTOR shall act, at his discretion, to prevent threatened
damage, 'injury or loss, Any additional compensation or extension of +
time claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work shall b2
determined as provided in Article 11 and 12 for Changes in the Work.
GC-12
F&N-78
I
v
1
J
i
Shop Drawings and Samples:
6,21. After checking and verifying all field measurements, CONTRACTOR
shall submit to ENGINEER for approval, in accordance with the accepted
schedule of Shop Drawing submissions (see paragraph 2,8) five copies
(or at ENGINEER's option, one reproducible copy) of all Shop Drawings, 1
which shall have been checked by and stamped with the approval of CONTRACTOR
and identified as ENGINEER may require, The data shown on the Shop Drawings
t will be complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria, materials
of construction and the like to enable ENGINEER to review the information
as required,
4 6,22, CONTRACTOR shall also submit to ENGINEER for approval with
such promptness as to cause no delay in Work, all samples required by
the Contract Documents, All samples will have been checked by and stamped
with the approval of CONTRACTOR, identified clearly as to material, manu-
facturer, any pertinent catalog numbers and the use for which intended, 1
6.23. At the time of each submission, CONTRACTOR shall in writing
' call ENGINEER's attention to any deviations that the Shop Drawings or
sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
6.24. ENGINEER will review and approve with reasonable promptness
Shop Drawings and samples, but his review and approval shall be only
for conformance with the design concept of the Project and for compliance
with the information given in the Contract Documents. The approval of
a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in
which the item functions, CONTRACTOR shall make any corrections required
by ENGINEER and shall return the required number of corrected copies
of Shop Drawings and resubmit new samples until approved. CONTRACTOR
' shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the
corrections called for by ENGINEER on previous submissions. CONTRACTOR's
stamp of approval on any Shop Drawing or sample shall constitute a repre- f
sentation to OWNER and ENGINEER that CONTRACTOR has either determined
I and verified all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria,
( materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or he assumes full responsibility
for doing so, and that he has reviewed or coordinated each Shop Drawing
or sample with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.
I 6,25, Where a Shop Drawins or sample submission is required by
ii the Specifications, no related Work shall be commenced until the submission
has been approved by ENGINEER. A copy of each approved Shop Drawing
and each approved sample shall be kept in good order by CONTRACTOR at
the site and shall be available to ENGINEER.
i
I
s
a
i F&N-78 GC-13
i
i
. 1
6,26, ENGINEER's approval of Shop Drawings or samples shall not
relieve CONTRACTOR from his responsibility for any deviations from
the requirements of the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in
Witing called ENGINEER's attention to such deviation at the time of
submission and ENGINEER has given written approval to the specific
deviation, nor shall any approval by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR from
responsibility for errors or ommissions in the Shop Drawings.
Cleaning;
t
6.27. CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free from accumulations
of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work,
and at the completion of the Work he shall remove all waste materials,
f; rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools,
construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials, and shall
leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by OWNER. CONTRACTOR
shall restore to their original condition those portions of the site
not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
Indemnification;
6,28. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER and
ENGINEER and their agents and employees from and against all claims,
damages, losses and expenses including, but not limited to, attorneys'
fees arising out of or resulting from any act, omission or defect connected
with the performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, r
loss or expense (a) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease
or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other
than the Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom
and (b) is caused in whole or in part by any condition of premises
or materials, act or omission of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable, regardlesF of whether or not is caused
in part negligently or otherwise, by a party indemnified hereunder.
6,29. In any and all claims against OWNER or ENGINEER or any i
of their agents or employees by any employee of CONTRACTOR, any Sub-
contractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification
obligation under paragraph 6.28 shall not be limited in any way by
any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits
payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor under workmen's com-
pensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. j
I
~j
F&N-78 GC-14
k
k
h
i
ARTICLE 7 - WORK BY OTHERS
7.1. OWNER may perform additional work related to the Project
by himself, or he may let other direct contracts. CONTRACTOR shall
afford the other contractors who are parties to such direct contracts
(or OWNER, if he is performing the additional work himself), reasonable
opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equip-
ment and the execution of work, and shall properly connect and co-
ordinate his Work with theirs.
7.2. If any part of CONTRACTOR's Work depends for proper
' execution or result upon the work of any such other contractor (or
OWNER), CONTRACTOR shall inspect and promptly report to ENGINEER in
writing any defects or deficiencies in such work that render it un-
suitable for such proper execution and result. His failure so to report
shall constitute an acceptance of the other work as fit and proper
for the relationship of his Work except as to defects and deficiencies
F' which may appear in the other work after the execution of his Work.
7.3. CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of
his Work that may be required to make its several parts come together
properly and fit it to receive or be received by such other work.
CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, exca-
vating or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter
their v)rk with the written consent of ENGINEER and of the other con-
tractors whose work will be affected.
j 7.4. If the performance of additional work by other contractors '
or OWNER is not noted in the Contract Documents prior to the execution
of the Agreement, notice thereof shall be given to CONTRACTOR prior
to starting any such additional work, j
E
ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
8.1. OWNER shall issue all communications to CONTRACTOR through
I ENGINEER.
8.2. In case of termination of the employment of ENGINEER, OWNER
i shall appoint an engineer against whom CONTRACTOR makes no unreason-
able objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be
that of the former ENGINEER. Any dispute in connection with such ap-
pointment shall be subject to arbitration.
8.3. OWNER shall furnish the data required of him under the
Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to CONTRACTOR
I promptly after they are due as provided in paragraphs 14.4 and 14.12.
i
t
j
s
F&N-78 GC-15
j
a
1
r
~i
8,4, OWNER's duties in respect of providing lands and easements
and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set
forth in paragraphs 4.1 and 4,4. Paragraph 4,2 refers to OWNER's identifying
and making available to CONTRACTOR copies of surveys and investigation
reports of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or other-
wise affecting performance of the Work which have been relied upon by
ENGINEER in preparing the Drawings and Specifications.
I
8.5. OWNER's responsibility in respect of certain inspections,
tests and approvals is set forth in paragraph 13.2.
8.6. In connection with OWNER's right to stop Work or suspend Work,
see paragraphs 13,8 and 15.1. Paragraph 15,2 deals with OWNER's right ;
• to terminate services of CONTRACTOR under certain circumstances.
ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
Owner's Representative;
9.1. ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative during the construction
period unless the OWNER advises the CONTRACTOR of other arrangements.
The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of ENGINEER
as OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in Articles
l through 17 of these General Conditions and shall not be extended without #
written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER,
Visits to Site,
9.2. Th: ENGINEER will make visits to the site to familiarize himself
generally with the progress and quality of the Work and to determine i
in general if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract
Documents, On the basis of his on-site observations as an ENGINEER,
he will keep the OWNER informed of the progress of the Work, and will
endeavor to guard the OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work
of the CONTRACTOR. The ENGINEER will not be required to make exhaustive
or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of
the Work. i
Clarifications and Interpretations,
9.3. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness such written {
clarifications, or interpretations of the Contract Documents (in the form
of Drawings or otherwise) as he may determine necessary, which shall
' be consistent with or reasonably inferable from the overall intent of
E the Contract Documents. If CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification
FAN-78 GC-16
• i
i
and interpretation entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price,
he may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11.
Rejecting Defective Work;
9.4. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or reject Work
which is "defective" (which term is hereinafter used to describe Work
that is unsatisfactory, faulty or defective, or does not conform to the
requirements of the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements
of the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any
in- spection, test or approval referred to in paragraph 13.2 or has been
I. damaged prior to approval of final payment), He will also have authority
to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in para-
graph 13.7, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments,
' 9.5. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibility for Shop Drawings 1
and samples, see paragraphs 6.21 through 6.26 inclusive.
9.6. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibility for Change Orders,
see Articles 10, 11 and 12,
. r
9.7. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibilities in respect {
of Applications for Payment, etc., see Article 14.
Resident Project Representatives,
9.8. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will furnish a Resident
Project Representative and assistants to assist ENGINEER in carrying
out his responsibilites at the site. The duties, responsibilities and
limitations of authority of any such Resident Project Representative
and assistants shall be as set forth in the Supplemental Conditions.
{
Decisions on Disagreements;
9.9. ENGINEER will be the interpreter of the requirements of the
Contract Documents and the judge of the performance thereunder. In his
capacity as Interpreter and judge ENGINEER will exercise his best efforts
to insure faithful performance by both OWNER and CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER
will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for the result
of any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith. Claims, disputes
and other matters relating to the execution and progress of the Work
or the interpretation of or performance under the Contract Documents
I
F&N-78 GC-17
1
y
i shall be referred to ENGINEER for decision; which he will render in
writing within a reasonable time.
9.10. Either OWNER or CONTRACTOR may demand arbitration with
respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter that has been re-
ferred to ENGINEER, except any which have been waived by the making
or acceptance of final payment as provided in paragraph 14,15, such
arbitration to be in accordance with Article 16, However, no demand
for arbitration of any such claim, dispute or other matter shall be
made until the earlier of (a) the date on which ENGINEER has rendered
his decision or (b) the tenth (10th) day after the parties have presented
their evidence to ENGINEER if he has not rendered his written decision i
({I before that date. No demand for arbitration shall be made later than
thirty (30) days after the date on which ENGINEER rendered his written
decision in respect of the claim, dispute or other matter as to which
arbitration is sought; and the failure to demand arbitration within j
said thirty (30) days' period shall result in ENGINEER's decision being
final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If ENGINEER renders a
decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision
may be entered as evidence but shall not supersede the arbitration
proceedings, except where the decision is acceptable to the parties
concerned.
i Limitations on ENGINEER's Responsibilities;
R
9.11. Neither ENGINEER's authority to act under this Article 9
or elsewhere in the Contract Documents nor any decision made by him
in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority shall
give rise to any duty or responsibility of ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR,
any Subcontractor, any materialman, fabricator, supplier or any of
( their agents or employees or any other person performing any of the
Work.
9.12. ENGINEER will not be responsible for COATRACTOR's means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the
safety precautions and programs incident thereto, and he will not be
responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform the work in accordance i
i with the Contract Documents. The ENGINEER shall have no responsibility
with respect to safety and has no obligation to see that the CONTRACTOR's
safety obligations are fulfilled.
i 9.13. ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or omissions
of CONTRACTOR, or any Subcontractor, or any of his or their agents
or employees, or any other persons at the site or otherwise performing
any of the Work.
f }
1 f
I
r
I F&N-78 GC-18
I
I
1
,
""lt
' J
ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
10.1 Without invalidating the Agreement, OWNER may, at any time
or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the
Work; these will be authorized by Change Orders. Upon receipt of a
Change Order, CONTRACTOR shall proceed with the Work Involved. All
such Work shall be executed under the applicable conditions of the
Contract Documents. If any Change Order causes an increase or de-
crease in the Contract Price or an extension or shortening of the
Contract Time, an equitable adjustment will be made as provided in
Article 11 or Article 12 on the basis of a claim made by either party,
10.2. ENGINEER may authorize minor changes or alterations in
the Work not involving extra cost or contract time and not incon-
sistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents, These may
I be accomplished by a Field Order, If CONTRACTOR believes that any
minor change or alteration authorized by ENGINEER entitles him to an
increase in the Contract Price or Contract Time, he shall not proceed
with the work and shall in writing advise the ENGINEER and requ'ast a
Change Order.
t
10.3. Additional Work performed by CONTRACTOR without author- ;
ization of a Change Order will not entitle him to claim an increase
in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, except
in the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6,20 and except
as provided in paragraph 13.7.
10.4. OWNER, after consideration and, approval, may execute ap-
propriate Change Orders prepared by ENGINEER covering changes in the
Work to be performed as provided in paragraph 4.3, and Work performed )
k in an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.20 and any other claim of
' CONTRACTOR for a change in the Contract Time or the Contract Price
which is approved by ENGINEER.
ARTICLE 11 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE
11.1. The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation pay-
able to CONTRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties, responsi-
bilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by CONTRACTOR shall
k' be at his expense without change in thy! Contract Price,
6 11.2. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order,
Any claim for an increase in the Contract Price shall be based on written
notice delivered to OWNER and ENGINEER within ten (10) days of the
occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount
of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within thirty
(30) days of such occurrence unless ENGINEER allows an additional
3 F&N-78 GC-19
i
T F_
+1
1
{
1 period of time to ascertain accurate cost data. All claims for ad-
justments in the Contract Price shall be determined by ENGINEER if
OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree ou the amount involved.
11.3. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any I
claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be de-
termined in one of the following ways;
11.3.1. Where the Work involved is covered by unit prices
l contained in the Contract Documents, by application of unit prices
I to the quantities of the items involved, unless actual quantities
differ from bid quantities by twenty (20%) percent. Revised con-
sideration will be given to that portion in excess of the twenty
(20%) percent difference subject to mutual acceptance of a revised
unit price.
11.3.2 By mutual acceptance of a lump sum.
11.3.3 On the basis of the actual cost directly related
to the Work plus a Contractor's Fee for overhead and profit in
the amount of fifteen (15%) percent. The actual cost shall be
limited to: labor, including foremen; materials entering perma-
nently into the work; the ownership or rental cost of construction
plant and equipment during the time of use on the extra work;
power and consumable supplies for the operation of power equip-
ment; insurance; and social security and old age and unemploy-
ment contributions.
i
11.4. The amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to OWNER +
for any such change which results in a net decrease in cost, will be
the amount of the actual net decrease which decrease shall include I
a CONTRACTOR's Fee for overhead and profit in the amount of fifteen
E (15%) percent. When both additions and credits are involved in any
E one change, the CONTRACTOR's fee of fifteen (15%) percent shall be
figured on the basis of the net increase, if any.
11.5. Whenever the cost of any Work is to be determined pursuant
to paragraph 11 CONTRACTOR will submit in form prescribed by ENGINEER
an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.
1
ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF THE CONTRACT TIME
i
12.1. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order.
Any claim for an extension in the Contract Time shall be based on written
notice delivered to OWNER and ENGINEER within ten (10) days of the
occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the extent
F&N-7B GC-20
F
T
I
I
J
t
of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within thirty
(30) days of such occurrence unless ENGINEER allows an additional period
of time to ascertain more accurate data. All claims for adjustment
in the Contract Time shall be determined by ENGINEER if OWNER and CON-
TRACTOR cannot otherwise agree. Any change in the Contract Time re-
sulting from any such claim shall be incorporated in a Change Order.
12.2. The Contract Time will be extended in an amount equal to
time lost due tc delays beyond the control of CONTRACTOR if he makes
a claim therefor as provided in paragraph 12.1. Such delays shall
include, but not be restricted to, acts or neglect by any, separate
contractor employed by OWNER, fires, floods, labor disputes, epidemics,
or acts of God other than weather conditions, No time extens",ons will
be allowed for weather conditions for Project using calendar days for
y the Contract Time.
} 12.3 The CONTRACTOR agrees that time is of the essence of this
contract, and that for each day of delay beyond the number of days
herein agreed upon for the completion of the work herein specified
and contracted for (after due allowance of such extension of time as
Is provided for in Article 12) the OWNER may withhold permanently from
the CONTRACTOR's total compensation, the amount per day set forth in
Supplementary Conditions, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages
and for added expense for engineering services, etc,
i
ARTICLE 13 - WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE: TESTS AND INSPECTIONS: CORRECTION,
REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
0 Warranty and Guarantee:
13.1. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to OWNER and ENGINEER
that all materials and equipment will be new unless otherwise specified
i and that all Work will be of good quality and free from faults or defects
and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and
of any inspections, tests or approvals referred to in paragraph 13.2,
All unsatisfactory Work, all faulty or defective Work, and all Work
not conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents at the
time of acceptance thereof or of such inspections, tests or approvals, {
shall be considered defective. Prompt notice of all defects shall 11
be given to CONTRACTOR. All defective Work, whether or not in place,
E may be rejected, corrected or accepted as provided in this Article 13.
+ Tests and Inspections:
h 13.2. If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regu-
lations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require
F&N-78 GC-Z]
any Work to specifically be inspected, tested, or approved by some
public body, CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility therefor,
pay all costs in connection therewith and furnish ENGINEER the required
{ artificates of inspection, testing or approval. All other inspections,
3 tests and approvals required by the Contract Documents shall be per-
otherwis e spOWNER a ecified the costs thereof shall
forme i rne by by organizations
unless selecte
be bo
13.3. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely notice of readiness
of the Work for all inspections, tests or, approvals. If any such Work
required so to be inspected, tested or approved is covered without
written approval of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be
uncovered for observation, and such uncovering shall be at CONTRACTOR's
expense unless CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER timely notice of his intention
to cover such Work and ENGINEER has not acted with reasonable promptness
in response to such notice.
13.4. Neither observations by ENGINEER nor inspections, tests
" or approvals by persons other than CONTRACTOR shall relieve CONTRACTOR
from his obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents.
Access to Work:
" 13.5. ENGINEER and his representatives and other representatives
of OWNER will at reasonable times have access to the Work. CONTRACTOR
testing access thereof and observation
shall e Work provide proper and
also for any e Inspection facilities or for such
of th by others,
j
Uncovering Work: J
13.6. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request
of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be uncovered for
ENGINEER's observation and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense. i
13.7. If any Work has been covered which ENGINEER has not speci-
fically requested to observe prior to its being covered, or if ENGINEER
considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be inspected
or tested, CONTRACTOR, at ENGINEER's request, shall uncover, expose
or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing
as ENGINEER may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing
all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such
Work is defective, CONTRACTOR shad bear all the expenses of such un-
covering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satis-
factory reconstruction, including compensation for additional professional
services, and an appropriate deductive Change Order shall be issued.
If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall
GC-22
E&N-78
1
71
1
be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the i
Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure,
observation, inspection, testing and reconstruction if he makes a claim
therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12.
i
Owner May Stop the Work:
13,8. If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails to supply
sufficient skilled workmen or suitable materials or equipment, or fails
to conform to the progress schedule required by Paragraph 14.1, or
if CONTRACTOR fails to make prompt payments to Subcontractors or for
labor, materials or equipment, OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the
Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been j
eliminated; however, this right of OWNER to stop the Work shall not
give rise to any duty on the part of OWNER to exercise this right for
the benefit of CONTRACTOR or any other party,
4
Correction or Removal of Defective Work:
13.9. If required by ENGINEER prior to approval of final payment,
CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and as specified by
ENGINEER, either correct any defective Work, whether or not fabricated,
installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by ENGINEER,
remove it from the site and replace it with nondefective Work. If
CONTRACTOR does not correct such defective Work or remove and replace
such rejected Work within a reasonable time, all as specified in a
written notice from ENGINEER, OWNER may have the deficiency corrected
or the rejected Work removed and replaced. All direct or indirect
costs of such correction or removal and replacement, including compen-
sation for additional professional services, shall be paid by CONTRACTOR,
and an appropriate deductive Change Order shall be issued, CONTRACTOR
shall also bear the expenses of making good all Work of others destroyed
or damaged by his correction, removal or replacement of his defective
Work.
I { One Year Correction Period: '
13,10, If, after the approval of final payment and prior to the
r" expiration of one year thereafter or such longer period of time as
may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special
guarantee required by the Contract Documents, any Work 's found to
be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and
in accordance with OWNER's written instructions, either correct such
E defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by OWNER, remove it from
the site and replace it with nondefective Work, If CONTRACTOR does
r promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, OWNER may
.aye the defective Work corrected or the rejected Work removed and
F&N-78 GC-23
5
E
f
~j
replaced, and all direct and indirect costs of such removal and re-
placement, including compensation for additional professional services,
shall be paid by CONTRACTOR.
Acceptance of Defective Work;
13.11. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replace-
ment of defective Work, OWNER prefers to accept it, he may do so.
In such case, if accepptance occurs prior to approval of final payment,
a Change Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions
in the Contract Documents, including appropriate reduction in the Con-
tract Price; or, if the acceptance occurs after approval of final pay-
ment, an appropriate amount shall be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER.
i
Neglected Work by Contractor,
13.12, If CONTRACTOR should fail to prosecute the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents, including any requirements of the progress
schedule, OWNER, after seven (7) days' written notice to CONTRACTOR
' may, without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such
deficiencies and the cost thereof (including compensation for additional
professional services) shall be charged against CONTRACTOR in which i
case a Change Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions
in the Contract Documents including an appropriate reduction in the
Contract Price. If the payments then or thereafter due CONTRACTOR
are not sufficient to cover such amount, CONTRACTOR shall pay the dif-
ference to OWNER.
ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
s
Schedules,
14.1. At least ten (10) days prior to submitting the first Appli-
cation for a progress OR shall submit a progress schedule,
payment, CONTRACT
a final schedule of Shop Drawing submission and a schedule of values
of the Work. These schedules shall be satisfactory in form and sub-
stance to ENGINEER. The schedule of values shall include quantities
and unit prices aggregating the Contract Price, and shall subdivide
the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the
basis for progress payments during construction. Upon approval of
the schedules of values by ENGINEER, it shall be incorporated into
the form of Application for Payment furnished by ENGINEER.
Application for Progress Payment,
14.2. At least ten (10) days before each progress payment falls
due (but not more often than once a month), CONTRACTOR shall submit to
!j
I F&N-73 GC-24
V
1
A
5
ENGINEER for review an Application for Payment on a form supplied by
the OWNER filled out and certified by CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed
as of the date of the Application. If payment is requested on the basis
of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered
and suitably stored at the site, the Application for Payment shall also
be accompanied by such data as required by OWNER, Each subsequent Appli-
cation for Payment shall also include an affidavit of CONTRACTOR stating
' that all previous progress payments received on account of thF Work have
been applied to discharge in full all of CONTRACTOR's obligation- reflected
in prior Applications for Payment. The CONTRACTOR shall cert'fy on each
Application for Payment that the Work performed to date complies with
the Contract Documents, ~
Contractor's Warranty of Title:
14.3. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all Work,
materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether
f incorporated in the Protect or not, will pass to OWNER at the time of
payment free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests and encumb-
rances (hereinafter in these General Conditions referred to as "Liens"). S
Approval of Payments,
14.4• ENGINEER will, within ten (10) days after receipt of each
Application for Payment, either indicate in writing his approval of payment
and present the Application to OWNER, or return the Application to CONTRACTOR i
indicating in writing his reasons for refusing to approve payment. In
the latter case, CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit
the Application. OWNER shall, within ten (10) days of presentation to
him of the approved Application for Payment, pay CONTRACTOR the amount
approved by ENGINEER less ten (10%) percent of the amount thereof which
shall be retained until Final Payment and less all other sums that may
be retained by the OWNER as set forth in the Contract Documents,
14.5. ENGINEER's approval of any payment requested in an Application
for Payment will constitute a representation by him to OWNER, based on
ENGINEER's on-site observations of the Work in progress as an experienced
and qualified design professional and on his review of the Application
for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules that the Work has
progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of his knowledge,
information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with
the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning
Project upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent
tests called for in the Contract Documents and any qualifications stated
in his approval); and that CONTRACTOR is entitled to payment of the amount
approved, However, by approving any such payment ENGINEER will not thereby
M-78 GC-25
J
1
i
j
I
be deemed to have represented that he made exhaustive or continuous on-
site inspections to check the quality or the quantity of the Work, or
that he has reviewed the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and pro-
cedures of construction, or that he has made any examination to ascertain
how or for what purpose CONTRACTOR has used the moneys paid or to be
paid to him on account of the Contract Price, or that title to any Work,
` materials or equipment has passed to OWNER free and clear of any Liens.
f 14.6, ENGINEER may refuse to approve the whole or any part of any
payment if, in his opinion, it would be incorrect to make such representations
to OWNER. He may also refuse to approve any such payment, or because
of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections
or tests, nullify any such payment previously approved, to such extent
as may be necessary in his opinion to protect OWNER from loss because;
14.6.1, the Work is defective, or completed Work has been
damaged requiring correction or replacement, 1
14.6.2, claims or Liens have been filed or there is reason-
able ca, n to ',nlieve such may be filed,
14.6.., the Contract Price has been reduced because of Modifications,
14.6.4. OWNER has been required to correct defective Work
{I or complete the Work in accordance with paragraph 13,11 or
{ 14.6.5, of unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work, including
failure to furnish acceptable submittals or to clean up.
14.6.6, reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed
within the Contract Time
,
E
14.6.7, reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for
0, the unpaid balance of the Contract Price.
Substantial Completion;
14.7. Prior to final payment, CONTRACTOR may, in writing to OWNER
and ENGINEER, certify that the entire Project is substantially complete
and request that ENGINEER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion.
Within a reasonable time thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall
make an inspection of the Project to determine the status of completion,
If ENGINEER does not consider the Project substantially complete, he
will notify CONTRACTOR in writing giving his reasons therefor. If ENGINEER
considers the Project substantially complete, he will prepare and deliver
F&N-78 GC-2f
r
{
1
J
4
i
to OWNER a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall
fix the date of Substantial Completion and the responsibilities between
OWNER and CONTRACTOR for maintenance, heat and utilities. There shall
be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed
or corrected before final payment, and the certificate shall fix the
time within which such items shall be completed or corrected, said time
" to be within the Contract Time. OWNER shall have seven (7) days after
receipt of the tentative certificate during which he may make written
objection to ENGINEER as to any provisions of the certificate or attached
list, If, after considering such objections, ENGINEER concludes that
the Project is not substantially i,;ete, he will within fourteen (14)
days after submission of the ten~at ve certificate to OWNER notify CONTRACTOR
In writing stating his reasons therefor. If, after consideration of
OWNER's objections, ENGINEER considers the PROJECT substantially complete, ! 1
1 he will within said fourteen (14) days execute and deliver to OWNER and
f CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a
revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting
such changes from the tentative certificate as he believes justified
after consideration of any objections from OWNER, The failure of the
1 ENGINEER to include any items on such tentative list of items to be completed
does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
14.8. OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the
Project after the date of Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow
CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative
list.
Partial Utilization;
}
14.9. Prior to final payment, OWNER may request CONTRACTOR in writing
' to permit him to use a specified part of the Project which he believes
he may use without significant interference with construction of the
other parts of the Project. If C014TRACTOR agrees, he will certify to
OWNER and ENGINEER that said part of the Projec`, is substantially com-
plete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion
for that part of the Project, Within a reasonable time thereafter OMi~ R, i
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of that part of the I
Project to determine ins status of completion, If ENGINEER does not
consider that it is substantially complete, he will notify OWNER and
CONTRACTOR in writing giving his reasons therefor, If ENGINEER considers
that part of the Project to be substantially complete, he will execute
and deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a certificate to that effect, fixing
the date of Substantial Completion as to that part of the Project, at-
taching thereto a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected
before final payment and fixing the responsibility between OWNER and
y is&N-78 GC-27
1
r
heat and Itilities as to that part of the
from any CONTRACTOR for maintenance, com-
project. OIiNER shall have,thehasgso certified tCObTR CTOtantiallyy part
of the Protect which ENGINEER plete, but OWNER shat allow CONTRl~sOR reasonable access to complete
or correct items
on the tentative Final Inspection:
14.10. Upon wri±ten notice from inOSpeRtio~RwithtOWNERPardeCONTRACTOR
complete, ENGINEER w111 make articulars in which this
and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of all p
the Work is ch measuresias and necessary toiremedy such CTOR
inspection reveals tketsu
` shall immediately to
deficiencies.
Final Application for Payment:
~ all such 14.11. After CONTRACTOR hasvcoedletldmaintenance and `operatingthe
satisfaction of ENGINEER g duarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection
required by the Contract Documpntss he may
instructions, schedules, g
and other documents - all as payment following the procedure for progress
make application for final { for payment shall be toaccompanied by
he final App) reasonably require, gether with
payments. T cation
satisfactory to OWNER)
such data and schedules as OWNER may
complete and legally of eofi the rContract Documents and tl boreander.
of all Liens arising
services performed and the material and equipment furnished
CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts
In lieu thereof and as approved by OWNER, and or releases in full; labor, service,, materiaOlRandaequipmeenteur whi ch
receipts include all l la a rolls, material a q
a Lien could be filed, and that all p y
nected wiresponsith bl the , Work have been paid or otherwise
bills, and other indebtedness connected
for merit
ri h OWNER any
E
or his property might in any way if any, e, final pay
satisfied; and consent of the Surety, lier fails to furnish a
fabcator or supp
Subcontractor, mate n,
in NER futol indeCONTR mnify ChOim against furnish any a Lien. Bond or other collateral
release or re~oiOW
satisfactory
+ Approval of Final Payment:
14.12. lf, on the basis of hiobservation and his g reviewiof thethefiWnaork
during construction, his final inspection lnd his for Payment - all
inspection and his re view of the final App
I
as required by the Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the
Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR has fulfilled all of his obligations
GC-28
F&N-78
`v t, '
i
1
under the Contract Documents, he will, within ten (10) days after receipt
of the final Application for payment, indicate in writing his approval
of payment and present the Application to OWNER for payment. There-
upon ENGINEER will give written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that
a the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of paragraph 14,15,
Otherwise, he will return the Application to CONTRACTOR, Indicating I
in writing his reasons for refusing to approve final payment, in which
case CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. OWNER shall, within ten (10) days of presentation to
him of an approved final Application for payment, pay CONTRACTOR amount approved by ENGINEER.
14.13, If after, Substantial Completion of the Work final com-
pletion thereof Is materiall delayed through no fault of CONTRACTOR,
ertification b ENGINEER, and
and ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER, upon c y
without terminating the Agreement, may make payment of the balance
due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted, If
the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is
loss than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if' Bonds have
! been furnished as required in paragraph 5.1, the written consent of
1 the Surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the
Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR
to the ENGINEER prior to certification of such payment. Such payment
shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment,
except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
Contractor's Continuing Obligation; i
14,14. CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work and complete I
the project in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute,
fr Neither approval of any progress or final payment by ENGINEER, nor
the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion, nor any pay-
ment by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents, nor any use
f or occupancy of the project or any part thereof by OWNER, nor any act
of acceptance by OWNER nor any failure to do so, nor any correction
of defective work by OWNER shall constitute an acceptance of Work not
in accordance with the Contract Documents,
i
P Waiver of Claims;
14,15. The making and acceptance of final payment shall consti-
tute a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than
I those previously made in writing and still unsettled,
i
i
i
GC-29
4 i&N-78
j,
i
j.
i
F
i
1
ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
Owner May Suspend Work:
15.1. OWNER may, at any time and without cause, suspend the Work
j or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (40) days
j by notice in writing to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER which shall fix the
date on which Work shall be resumed. CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work
on the date so fixed. CONTRACTOR may be allowed an 'Increase in the
Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly
attributable to any suspension if he makes a claim therefor as provided
in Articlos 11 and 12. ,
' Owner May Terminate;
15.2. If CONTRACTOR is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, or
if he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors,
or if a trustee or receiver is appointed for CONTRACTOR or for any
of his property, or if he files a petition to take advantage of any
debtor's act, or to reorganize under the bankruptcy or similar laws,
or if he repeatedly fails to supply sufficient skilled workmen or suit-
able materials or equipment, or if he repeatedly fails to make prompt
payments to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment or
if he disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of
any public body having jurisdiction, or if he disregards the authority
of ENGINEER, or if he otherwise violates any provision of the Contract {
Documents, then OWNER may, without prejudice to any other right or
remedy and after giving CONTRACTOR and his Surety seven (7) days' written
notice, terminate the services of CONTRACTOR and take possession of
the Project and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment
and machinery thereon owned by CONTRACTOR, and finish the Work by whatever
method he may deem expedient, In such case CONTRACTOR shall not be
entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished.
If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct and
indirect costs of completing the Project, Including compensation for
additional professional services, such excess shall be paid to CONTRACTOR.
Y~ If such costs exceed such unpaid balance, CONTRACTOR shall pay the
difference to OWNER. Such costs incurred by OWNER shall be determined
by ENGINEER and incorporated in a Change Order.
M 15.3. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so terminated by
OWNER, said terminations shall not affect any rights of OWNER against
CONTRACTOR then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention
or payment of moneys by OWNER due CONTRACTOR will not release CONTRACTOR
from liability,
i
I
F&N-7a GC-30
i
I
9
U on seven (7) days' written notice to CONTRACTOR and ENGI-
NEER, OWNER may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right
or remedy, elect to abandon the Project and
terminate, such case, CONTRACTOR shall be paid for allWork executedrandeany
expense sustained plus a reasonable profit,
` Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate:
f 15.5. If, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the Work is
suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by OWNER or under
an order of court or other public authority, or ENGINEER fails to act
on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is
submitted, or OWNER fails to pay CONTRACTOR any sum approved by ENGINEER
or awarded by arbitrators within thirty (30) days of its approval and
fs presentation, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven (7) days' written notice
to OWNER and ENGINEER, terminate the Agreement and recover from OWNER
}r i payment for all Work executed and any expense sustained plus a rea
on-
able profit. In addition and in lieu of terminating the Agreement,
if ENGINEER has failed to act on an Application for Payment or OWNER
has failed to make any payment as aforesaid, CONTRACTOR may upon seven
(7) days' notice to OWNER and ENGINEER stop the Work until he has been '
paid all amounts then due.
ARTICLE 15 - ARBITRATION J
16.1. All claims, disputes and other matters in question arising rl
out of, or relating to, this Agreement or the breach thereof except
for claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final
Jj payment as provided by paragraph 14.15, shall be submitted to arbitra-
tion at the request of either party to the dispute. The parties may
` agree upon one arbiter, otherwise, there shall be three, one named j
1 in writing by each party, and the third chosen by the two arbiters
so selected; or if the arbiters fail to select a third within ten (10)
days, he shall be chosen by a District Judge serving the County in
which the major portion of the Project is located, unless otherwise
specified, Should the party demanding arbitration fail to name an '
arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate
shall lapse, and the decision of the ENGINEER shall be final and binding
on him. Should the other party fail to choose an arbiter within ten
{10) days, the ENGINEER shall appoint such arbiter, Should either
party refuse or neglect to supply the arbiters with any papers or in-
formation demanded in writing, the arbiters are empowered by both
parties to take ex parte proceedings, The arbiters shall act with
promptness, The decision of any two shall be binding on both parties
to the contract, The decision of the arbiters upon aiy uestlon sub-
mitted to arbitration under this contract shall be a candition
j
P&N-78 GC-31
l
i
I,
{
precedent to any right of legal action. The decision of the arbiter
or arbiters may be filed in court to carry it into effect. The arbiters,
if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to award the party
whose contention is sustained, such sums as they deem proper for the
time, expense and trouble incident to the appeal, and if the appeal
was taken without reasonable cause, they may award damages for any
delay occasioned thereby. The arbiters shall fix their own compensation,
unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the cost and
charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award
of the arbiters must be made in writing.
16.2. CO RALYOR will carry on the Work and maintain the progress
schedule during any arbitration proceedings, unless otherwise agreed
by hire and OWNER in writing.
ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS
Giving Notice;
1
17.1. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires
the giving of written notice it shall be deemed to have been validly
given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the
firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or
if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage pre-
paid, to the last business addross known to him who gives the notice,
Computation of Time;
17.2. When a period of time is referred to in the Contract Docu-
ments by days, it shall be computed to exclude the first and include
the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls
on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law
of the applicable ,jurisdiction, such day shall be omitted from the E
computation,
w General;
17.3. All Specifications, Drawings and copies thereof furnished
by ENGINEER shall remain his property. They shall not be used on another
Project, and, with the exception of those sets which have been signed
in connection with the execution of the Agreement, shall be returned
to him on request upon completion of the Project,
17.4. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Con-
ditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder, and, in particular
i
i
r i
F&N-78 GC-32
y
,y
1
1
1
I
but without limitation, the warranties, guarantees and obligations
6.?.8, 13.1, 13.1D and 1A.3 and
imposed upon CONTRACTOR by paragraphs
the rights anddd remedies available tnotl,beRconatruedNinRany waynasra
shall be ition to, and shall limitat tiionn a of any rights and remedies available to them which are
Limi,
otherwise imposed or available by law, by special guarantee or by other
provisions of the Contract Documents. E
17,5. The Contract Documents shall be governed by the law of
the place of the Project,
E
Y
F ,
I
GC-33
' F&N~78
S SUPPLE MENTARY COND1TlONS
Subsurface explorati n
I, PHYSICAL CO~naTIONS - SURVEYS nC-uREngAtle amount of rock, if an) is
to usee tT~eture o $o s,
the responsibility of any and all prospeuch ctive bidders. It shall be the
Investigafjons as he
onslbility of the bi ddersto make s subsurface b e encounter"'
deems necessary to determine the nature of the material l to to be re ,
p
of tt~, work
will rovde rid reference points and
REFERENCE PO--r7- From INTS: The Engineer base lineior gt the site
controls est bushed
.
I . rizon'taTcon ro n the form o late
ho form of ben0h vertical control thetContractor shall berresp nsiblefarthecomp
by the Engineer,
d for Contractor ishallis and lnfurnishelpeguipmentXpincluding
layout of the work an The
during construction, competent perso
' , platforms, tools, and
labors including the services of the
surveying instruments, stakes, out templany and templates t parts of
accurate work.
materials as may be required for laying
The Engineer will be available for assistance in an advisoirementsiof
,
y
30 INSURANCE: The Contractor shall comply with the and shallo a his
paragr`apF3~~of the General ino or of ce osuchinsuranceaswillwprotect expense him
or his any ati ons under this
purchase, maintain and keep Subcontractor or
from claims which mucharise Out nsare byshimself from
contract, whether s ipndi of them or by anyone for
by anyone directly or rectly employed by any
whose acts any of them may be liable, Minimum insurance requirements are
to be as outlined in the Table of "Insurance Men~iuim mgRequirements" shall
Such insurance as is required in the "Insuranc in the event of
-in walratileast thirty days
be written so that owner or otinonjrene
P cancellation, ates of Insurance on the form attached to i
prior to such action. Certific ior to the commencement of the
this section shall be filed with the owner Pr
work.
All insurance required under tand theaCityhshallareceiveratduplicatetcopy
City of Denton ascoolicy required.
of every insurance p this ara
ne what
tygraph to determi are
The stated limit be ithe nsurance req riseresp nsibili olicylinitsllor
Policy
ONLY and it shall be basic
limits are adequate. These minimum limits may
any combinatioo bresponsible for allrlossesiarisingioutnofPorenulting
Contractor is fully '
1 from or connected with o erations under this contract whether or not
pp The Owner's acceptances of
the
j said losses are covered by insurance. respect do not comply
Certificates of Insurance that, in any
contract requirements does not release the contractor from compliance
herewith.
a
a
g OOPOO-I
7
t.
The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other for damages
i caused by fire or other perils to the extent their interests are covered
by insurance under this Section, except such rights as they may have to
the proceeds of such insurance when held by the Owner as trustee. The
Contractor shall require similar waivers by Subcontractors and Sub-sub-
contractors.
4. INSPECTION; The Owner will inspect or cause inspection to be per-
forme o-fi a-l-items of work for this project. The use of the term "ENGINEER" "OWNER'S AGENT", or "OWNER'S DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE"
regarding inspection in the Contract Documents shall be understood to mean
the Owner will perform inspection duties with his own forces.
5. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: In the event the Contractor fails to attain
substan a comp e Von of the entire project fall bid items) within the
time set forth in the Proposal, the Owner may withhold money permanently
from the Contractor's total compensation a sum of $240,00 per day as
liquidated damages and for added expenses for engineering services, etc.,
in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. The Owner will
be the sole judge as to whether the work has been completed within the
allotted time.
b. MINIMUM WAGE SCALE: The rates shown in attached "Schedule B" have been
determineT6y of Denton, 1'exas, in accordance with the statutory
requirements and prevailing local wages.
t ~
i
Y ~
r
008001.2
~r
i
~as
` CI'I } Ur uGl!'1'uA
lA5UKt4i1CL' .(il~l1?IU,~I kf: U1K1:+If \I' '
I+it110ut I uritin un of
thu otner ouligaticrls or 11auilities oi.
tllO ~urttractor, the Curttructor shall Proviue ullu
the work is cuulpluteu anu acceptet
Y u tn( C1 t
1
Owner, wirtirnuln insurance covera a as by maintain until
I y
of Uantun
1 - 6 s tullulrs:
T `1'f'P l u C I( 1, L
h Orcnal 5 CUAI 1, ~H 7i11\ L .a 'I S UF`~L b I L 1 "
ST~i ul ui(
1!. CU,`'IPI(LIIEASIVr- GI,,\GKttL L1A11ILIT
}
lluuily Injury a
$SuU,Uuu $JUu,Uuu
Eucn occurance Aggregate
Property uamuge ~(1
W1UU, UUU $1t+U, UUU
Lich accident Agg.•ebute
l111. CU;~I pI(l;fi l;,\~~ly'L AU'l U,~lUtSlLh L1AUlL17'Y
liu(Jily Injury
$lSU,UUu $5UU,UUU '
Liicll Ile rSurl
Propurty I)ill,la e I:uC`I at ClllellC
1' $1UU,000
i I/aCII itcCI(lunt
rl In ii ddItIun to
the insurance ueASCt'1beu
Contractor Sna
11 ad v
0o u
rain 1.
PItUT1iC'I1V1: LlAlsli,1,1'}' I,15U1(r(nCf: i'IUl ltry x npaunse an t'1( l
Lepton as irlsul'c;(1 lilttl tliu [oilol<in llllli tS; Ui+l1L'u
minf; tile City o>
uuoll.} I;vJU1t}"
$lUU,uUU (:acn person
$3UU,UIIU ('nCn i7Cci(jellt $1VU,i7tlU CaCll aCC1dC/1C
$lUU,UuU ilhbre7l{8 tC 11 t OVC1.i t11, the uurr; to be purforuleu I), ;
y of Denton. f flit t:ontrucCot' for he C
If' 711u contractor Dill Iurnisll tnu
Policy uasCriue(f uuove Unner s
Lau CII trio tollul+~iniln(1i7 execute ►rutectivu
[rte Let'[i1ic:,[(
Cle LUr ItS approval. f' I be tU the 1;1 Cy Ot
ConunenCinl; ail ViU 111SUrU71CL IJUSC u dCCC 7 , LenC01!
e it Cu uafura
insurance applies, r1 unuer t ll c cuntruct t o >tilli c It
[Iris
i
a
G1 1
Oil
1 Atli.) 13 Iu LtK111 Y Uiat t1le lutluwing policies. Subject to their leans, cunditiuns and exclusruus, hour been issucJ
the company or companies shown below;
THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE neither a(irmatWei,y or negatively amends. oxiends or alters the euveratr a71'urJed
• 7 '.policy of pulicies shown below, nor is it an endursemcni inakmg the penon, firm or curporauon of whusu rayuest it li rssuud
.udiiionul insured on dio policy or policies Welled to herein,
l In the event of any material change in or cancellation of the policy or polluies, (ho co
days' written notfce to the party to whom this uertiticate is addressed, mpany or companies will thud left l
NAME ANO ADORBSS OF PARTY TO WHOM CERTIFICATE Is 1ssuEO
REMARKS. j
City of Denton Bid P
215 E. McKinney i,
Dentin, TX 76201
Attn: John J. Marshall, C.P.M.
Purchasing Agent:
tJAd~@ „wG NQaaB,s or INSURear
WElrZWL CONS7RUM01v) iNG,
! P 0. box "*')890
19
1 n
ONOL uL 1
u, HAwAu 96 81,2
MwraneeCompanv Polley ! Efiresrvs
Type of Irnueanl ~Y Ervbanan
111111 Number Data LIMITS OF . AMF,~q/C,giy are uAelt.trv-
Workmen's Compenutiorr~ j
slalularv
/r and WCg4-1080/ l2-31-8¢ 12-31-85'
A SSYIR~ l cmptpyaR Liability
;fmolnvertLiamllWlmrts-1100.0(
7~cAr'EL~' S 1 Comprehendw i -r---_... I
Oenere7 Luilyt aoady Inlurv
rlrs
bility W 4 SL POV2741 12-'31-R4 /z-3,r•-Bs
S 00 00
:n q tutyrrnG_r
'S ,s- A req+lte Rroauoia ~ ~
I r---~ dOO~eied oysra i
flOLLIIN,d- ,fir y I IIIj Ipre llarly OJymxy♦
iT nr IN 9660,2 I .•.71~ r ~S 0O E)ch Occolfpn Ce r_
A ME'R /CA ~9 1 /2 3~rb~S
(sAyp~, rr7So ~SzSOT_OOpArepate Uaerstro_n
JI O DOa99regale Prone- ~,w! - ~
I ^ -
f S agare9ale Con tr. ictu
lu I' ~ I I +99rlgare rronucts I
P TRAVELERS Comnrehensive ~/SlL/90¢12y,2 /2-31- S.Z$dluev CJmnulldr~ar I
1aH
ZNS, Automobile t.iiululy.. tiawiv inurv
JJ 5 711!` E )ch p"sen
1
5.001000 COh#A/N~z) 8/N" f ~I lprooerly 0am316
_ S~"t/Mir l
A06SOW 01ANE //Fr rAT/oN 5_ )~E t aen ,G~~rrl r!
* .9E, d ,w,,~,j~od, d a rl a to y,~GeN7RAcr I,~93si
44
a.►z Ada'i m,, 2su at! 6a ao lc
loq a` 71-104 eQ na heee,
ate. ';iftezov. hvC.''h, Cold? kleA
eke or Oll by 10 proartau enrrv means no _ SAC
:overt aR or none ion such insurah<e If in farce, ~q = •--•--m_:
,t o eJ or hired vlhiGks, ti .L\b AD4RL55 OF .1CCIC'!
k/Nc~ N4 ~ 4 Na
1/64-'61-570? s7REcr, solzF- 171a
8n~ 5z - 8,31/ ryORW&V, ¢ f,Aw~ii
Auttloriled ~KOttc >n,^flc4, ar eecltc•r
4..~_~h rtS*Mfalr~iW'N Of the Inweante ComaanUr rlr/rip 11 1,,,
p CERTIFICATE' 01; INSUIIANCB
Certlflcalc !luldet
Named insured
City Of Aen t0Iw1-_ xaS
901 13 Texas St, Yeltzul. Con.9truct.ion, Iuc,
DentonrTexas 76201 WoftznJ I11t•ernnt:Eona1, Lnc,
11,0. Box 3890
ilonolulu, Ilawnii 96812
This is to certify flint tile lusurnuc0 hldErated hereunder Ims been ksuad and is In hill force nlid effect on the effectivo
dale of Ihfs certfffcale, 'fills cerllflcato clues not lu 'Illy way amend, extend, alter or vary ilia coverage afforded by the
pollcy or policies refdrred it) berelu.
,
IjcerillIcale holiki U a loss yayce, check Aere 11
and Yollcy Nunlber kINI) OF INSURANCE Aryl) COVLr11AMS _ - -
PItlA11U1
Americon Roma 1YORKhlt:N ;S COf,lPIMA'1'ION Suiutnry
WG84-10801 I1h1I'LOYER'S LIABILITY y
_ S IOU ,000 cacti accident 12131 5
' Travalora If1J, HOMILY IN1Urt1' LInf31L1'1'Y
1181,19001272 ESXCEPTAUl'Oh1UDILE' S 5()0 o0nrnchoaurro"c'° 1?,/31/£I!i
IlaIlund--Amorica PROPERTY I)AMACI? MA11IL1'I'Y -
(Sayre 6 Tonto) -PXC171'TAU'fOMO111LE* s 7.250 DOOearrepile pence 12/31/£15
11 9660?. s 50 nn.(:nrpnlenpnallonr
s 250 .000 nkl;rennle prolrcUrt
S 250 .000aggrrpteproducn
$ 250 ooo swegat0 connocluol ;
Travelers Ino, NODILY IN11RY LIABILITY - It 4- ~ NO Oea
S nm, 12./31/8!)
1481,19001272 -AU'1'Uh10111L13 * mll oc
cu oecun0nc0
q PROPERTY DANIAUi1 LIAB1IS_ 'Y r '
rl A1J1'OM0llILI3 +
'f 00004th occru3ence It
1 PHYSICAL I)AMAC;II-AU'E'06101)1LE--Aeluai Cash Valtte Unless 01helwlse Stated
CUf+iP1t Eir I I?NS1 VI? S
C01111ISION OR UPSET f,t s S
deduclll le i
FIRE AND THITT
•I/eo)rq+ralreuNvollabtlN,r,rhec'khare 68
* $500,000, Combined Sf.nr~lr. Limit
j pescllpllon of Will, Icr.4tlun, . pra)dct to which 1103 cortlflcale apples r
)lobeon Lane Lift Station
I
I
Y Tllir ty , f 30 1 I1,ry.s written notice of eancellallun or rMuctfon hl nnrouuns of lusuraree 3ludl be given to ilia above n+nnrd
hnldul of Ihls certlllcare,
VJIe: t2/1.5/SG }m KINt;1'<1JIilL,tA1c,
i"' IIfi4Illdrnn.Cr Sr!!Ir f7111~
Y; .
Trade-Craft Classification Rate Per Hour
Concrete Paving Form Grader
Concrete Paving Joint Machine
Concrete Paving Longitudinal Float 6135
Concrete Paving mixer 7.75
Concrete Paving Baw 6,05
Concrete Paving Spreader
Paving Sub Grader
Crane, Clamshell, aackhoe, Derrick,
Dragllne, Shovel (lasa than 1 1/2 CY) 7,00
Crane, Clamshell, aackhoe, Derrick,
Dragllne, Shovel (1 1/2 CY & Over) 7.35
Crusher or Screening Plant Operator
Elevating Grader
Form Loader
! Foundation Drill Operator (Crawler
Mounted)
Foundattion Drill Op. (Truck :Bounced) 8.25
Foundation Drill Operator Helper 5.45
Front End Loader (2 1/2 CY & Less) 6.15 ' t
Front End Loader (Over 2 1/2 CY) 7.25
Hoist (Over 2 drums) 6.00
Mixer (Over 16 CF)
Mixer (15CF & Loss)
• Motor Grader Operator, Fine Grada 1.55
Motor Grader Operator 7.25
j Roller, Steel Wheal (?lent-,fix
Pavements) 6.35
Roller, Steel 'dhoel (Otoor-Flat
Wheel or Tamping) 6.45
Roller, pneumatic I5elf-P:ap911ad1 5.15
Scrapers (17 CY & Less) 6.25
Scrapes (Over 17 CY) 6.90
Side Boom
Tractor (Crawler Type) 150 HP 6 Lasa f
W Tractor (Crawler Type) over 130 HP 6.90
Tractor (Pneumatic) 80 HP & Loss 9160
Tractor (Pheumatic) over 80 HP 6.75
Traveling Mixer
Trenchinq Machine, Light
WagonDrill, Bocing Heavy at Post
( n
Nola Driiler operator 5.25
Truck Drivers)
Singla Axle, Lignt 3.35
Single Axle, Heavy
Tandem Axle or Semitrailer
M Louuoy-Float
Transit-Mix 5.70
lunch
Welder 7,13
Weldor Weiper
-lie CONTRACTOR snail comply +e.n al: State and :nderal Laws
applicaola co such worx,
The above ere mlainam Cates. 3.3dera snail oase :aeir oiae in
rAt9s C114Y expect sc pay, is in excess a, :nosd lilt?d, Pne
OWNER wil- cot consi3et clA i.r~s 'or extra Payment :o =NTRACTOB.
an sccoont oe payment of wages oipner Cann .nose speci'ied.
i
G 12.5
1
i
i
01001 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
1,01 SCOPE OF WORK
The work involved under this contract consists of the furnishing of
all materials, tools, equipment, transportation, services, and all
labor and superintendence necessary for the construction and com-
pletion of the Hobson Lane Lift Station as shown on the Plans and
described in these specifications.
1,02 EXCESS EARTH
Excess earth from the various excavations (earth not required for
backfill or embankment), shall be disposed of by the Contractor,
off the site, at no additional expense to the Owner.
,
1,03 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION
Excavation will be unclassified. It shall be the responsibility
of the hidder to make such subsurface investigations as he deems
necessary to determine the nature of material to be excavated,
1.04 CORRECTION PERIOD
Nothing in the General Conditions Article 13 concerning the
correction period shall establish a period of limitation with 1
respect to any other obligation which Contractor has under the
Contract Documents. The establishment of time periods relates
only to the specific obligations of Contractor to correct the
work, and has no relationship to the time within which his i
obligations under the Contract Documents may be sought to be
enforced, nor to the time within which pru,;eedings may be
commenced to establish his liability with respect to his obli•
gations other than to specifically correct the work. This
correction period shall be covered by the extension of the Per-
formance Bond.
1,05 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING FACILITIES
It will he necessary, during the course of construction, to make
several connections to the existing wastewater collection system,
All work involved in making connections which will require a shutdown
1 of any components of the existing system shall be carefully planned
and coordinated with both the Engineer and the Owner so that "down"
time of the existing system may be held to a minimum. On occasions
when the existing system is down for purpose of mat.-iny a connection,
work shall proceed on a 24-hour schedule until the wastewater
collection system is back in operation,
I
01001-1
I
i
1.06 WORKMANSHIP
1
These specifications contain detail instructions and descriptions '
covering the major items of construction and workmanship necessary
for building and completing the various units or elements of the j
project. The specifications are intended to be so written that
only first class workmanship and finish of the best grade and
quality will result. The fact that these specifications may fail
i to be so complete as to cover all details will not relieve the
Contractor of full responsibility for providing a completed
project of high quality, first class finish and appearance and
satisfactory for operation, all within the apparent intent of the j
plans and specifications.
1.07 SANITATION FACILITIES
The Contractor shall provide portable toilet facilities
(Chem-cans) in sufficient number for the Contractor's use
throughout the course of the project and in accordance with OSHA
requirements.
1.08 SALVAGED MATERIAL
{
During construction of the project any equipment or materials
which have been the property of the Owner and which is salvaged by
the Contractor shall remain the property of the Owner, Brick and
concrete rubble shall be the property of the Contractor and shall j
be disposed of off the plant site.
1.09 MATERIALS
These specifications are intended to be so written that only
materials of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The
fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete
in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full respon-
sibility for providing materials of high quality and protecting
them adequately until incorporation in the structure. The
specifications for materials set out the minimum standard of
quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satis-
factory project. No substitutions will be permitted until the
Contractor has received written permission of the Engineer to make
a substitution for the material which has been specified,
Where the term "or equal", or "or approved equal" is used, it is
understood that if a material, product, or piece of equipment of
the specified name and quality is furnished it will be approvable,
as the particular name was used for the purpose of establishing a
standard of quality acceptable to the Owner. If a product of any
4 other name is proposed for use, the Engineer's approval thereof
must be obtained before the proposed substitute is procured by the
Contractor. Wherever the term $or equal" is used, it is under-
stood to mean "or approved equal",
01001-2
ti
{
7
Y' 1.10 COST BREAKDOWN
Within thirty (30) days after the execution of the Contract, and
not less than ten (10) days prior to the first monthly estimate,
the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a cost breakdown of
the work under this Contract. This breakdown is for use by the
F Engineer in preparing the monthly estimates and for the Owner's
use in cost accounting for the project. The breakdown shall be in
detail, itemizing all items of equipment and construction and
shall accurately reflect the cost of all work as included in the
bid prices. Cost breakdown shall be such that an overall cost of
the various elements of the project can be determined.
1.11 PROGRESS SCHEDULES
Within 10 days prior to submission of first monthly progress payment,
the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval
six copies of the schedule in which the Contractor proposes to carry
on the work the date of which he will start the several major
ta, activities including procurement of materials, and equipment) and
the contemplated dates for completing the same. The schedule shall
' be in the form of a progress chart of suitable scale to indicate
graphically the percentage of work scheduled for completion at any
time. As the work progresses, the Contractor shall enter on the
chart the actual progress at the end of each partial payment period
or at such intervals as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall also revise the schedule to reflect any adjustments in contract
time approved by the Engineer. Three copies of the updated schedule I
shall be delivered at such intervals as directed by the Engineer.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, work accomplished falls behind '
' that scheduled, the Contractor shall take such action as necessary
E to improve his progress. In addition, the Engineer may require
the Contractor to submit a revised schedule demonstrating his
h , program and proposed plan to make up lag in scheduled progress and
to insure completion of the work within the contract time. If the
Engineer finds the proposed plan not acceptable, he may require
the Contractor to increase the work force, the construction plant
and equipment, the number of work shifts or the overtime opera-
tions without additiona. cost to the Owner.
Failure of the Contractor to comply with these requirements shall
be considered grounds for determination by the Engineer that the
k, Contractor is failing to prosecute the work with such diligence as
will insure its completion within the time specified.
1.13 TESTS
In addition to the tests called for in the Specifications, the
b Owner may rifle tests made of pipe and materials for conformity
g with the Specifications by an independent testing laboratory.
01001-3
4
' r
i
j
Such independent laboratory will be selected and paid by the
Owner. The Owner may require the Contractor to furnish mill test
certificates on reinforcing steel or wire, cast iron pipe and
fittings, and cement.
1.14 FINAL TESTING AND OPERATION +
Prior to presentation for final acceptance of the work under this
contract, the Contractor shall have started and operated all units
of the lift station for a sufficient duration of time to permit the
Engineer to observe overall performance of the respective units
and equipment. Such operation shall be properly coordinated with
the Owner's operating personnel.
1.15 SANITATION AND CLEANUP
During construction, the Contractor shall maintain the premises in
an orderly, neat, and presentable condition. Scraps and debris ,
111 shall nit be left scattered around but shall be assembled in one
j place. When construction under this Contract has been otherwise
completed, the Contractor shall remove all left over construction
materials, equipment, scraps, debris and rubbish, and leave the
site in a neat, well kept appearance.
At the completion of the work, all buildings and structures shall
be broom clean. The Contractor shall clean the walls of all
hydraulic structures of dirt, stains, or other materials and pipes
shalt be left free of any and all foreign material, The Con.,
tractor shall remove all marks, stains, dirt and soil from all J
finished surfaces and shall thoroughly clean all floors, clean and 11
polish all finished hardware and other such devices.
1,16 PROTECTING EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
Where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and
utilities, the Contractor shall at his own expense carefully
support and protect all such structures and/or utilities so that
there will be no failure or settlement. Where it is necessary to
move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines or other obstructions,
i the Contractor shall notify and cooperate with the utility owner,
1. In case damage to an existing structure or utility occurs, whether
failure or settlement, the Contractor shall restore tho structure
or utility to its original condition and position without compen-
sation from the Owner.
Contractor shall repair or replace all damaged street surfaces,
driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, drainage
structures, or other structures, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and the Owner, Structures shall be restored to a con-
dition equal to or better than the original condition and of a
similar material and design. The costs of such repair or replace-
ment shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be included in the
Proposal.
01001-4
j
i
I
4
I 1
1
The Engineer has shown all existing piping, valves, electrical
conduits, utility poles, etc. as best can be determined from
available records. The Contractor shall verify the type, size,
and location of all existing piping and valves in the construction
r area. All piping, valves, electrical conduit, etc, in the
construction area shall be removed and/or relocated as necessary
in a manner acceptable to the Engineer, and no additional com-
pensation will be considered for relocating any of these items i
whether shown on the plans or not,
4
1.17 REFERENCE STANDARDS
Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization,
or association, or to codes of local and state authorities, shall j
i mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative
specification adopted and published at the date of taking bids,
unless specifically stated otherwise,
1.18 METHODS OF OPERATION
a a
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in advance concerning his
plans for carrying on each part of the work, but the Contractor
alone shall be responsible for the safety, adequacy, and
efficiency of his plant, equipment, and methods.
Any method of work suggested by the Owner or Consulting Engineer,
but not specified, shall be used at the risk and responsibility of
the Contractor, and the Consulting Engineer and Owner will assume
no responsibility therefor.
Review by the Owner or Consulting Engineer of any plan or method
' of work proposed by the Contractor shall not relieve the Con-
tractor of any responsibility therefor, and such review shall not
be considered as an assumption of any risk or liability by the
Owner or Consulting Engineer, or any officer, agent, or employee 3
thereof. The Contractor shall have no claim on account of the
failure or inefficiency of any plan or method so reviewed.
l
The Owner and the Consulting Engineer will not be responsible for !
any act or omission of the Contractor, or any subcontractor, or t
any of their agents or employees, or any other persons performing f
any of the work. The Owner and Consulting Engineer will not be
responsible for any failure of the Contractor or his subcon~
tractors or any other persons to perform the work in accordance ! i
with the requirements of the contract documents.
1,19 UNFAVORABLE CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS
During unfavorable weather, wet ground, or other unsuitable 1
construction conditions, the Contractor shall confine his oper-
ations to work which will not be affected adversely thereby, No
01001-5
portion of the work shall be constructed under conditions which
would affect adversely the quality or efficiency thereof, unless
special means or precautions are taken by the Contractor to
perform the work in a proper and satisfactory manner.
1.20 PUMPING AND DEWATERING OPERATIONS
The Contractor shall provide all necessary pumping, as required by '
the excavation work specification, to remove all surface water,
ground water, leakage, and water from other sources from excavations.
1.21 DEFINITIONS
Y,
Whenever the words, forms or phrases defined herein, or pronouns
used in their place occur in these specifications, or in any
} document or instrument herein contemplated, the intent and meaning
shall be interpreted as follows: a
BHP - Brake Horsepower
M - r
BIL - Basic Impulse Level
BTU - British Thermal Unit
EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER OR VENDOR - A manufacturing company engaged
n 5 pro uc ono equ-ipinent or materials purchased for use in
this project.
GPM or gpm - Gallons per Minute E
HP - Horsepower i
MA - Kilovolt Amperes i
KW - Kilowatt
MGD - Million Gallons per Day
NPSH - Net Positive Suction Head
r 1 PIV - Peak Inverse Voltage
PF Power Factor
RPM - Revolutions per Minute
i TDWR - Texas Department of Water Resources
THD - Texas Department of Highways and Public Transportation
i 1.22 STANDARDS
Reference to technical society, organization or body is made in
Specifications in accordance with the following abbreviations;
01001-6
'j
AASHO American Association of State Highway Officials
AIA American Institute of Architects
ACI American Concrete Institute
AGA American Gas Association
AGMA American Gear Manufacturer's Association
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction ,
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standard Institute
ASA American Standards Association
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
AWSC American Welding Society Code I
AWWA American Water Works Association
x
CSI Construction Specification Institute
FIA Factory Insurance Association
FM Factory Manual
FS Federal Specification M
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers j
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NEPA National Hire Protection Association i
NBS National Bureau of Standards
NEC National Electric Code
OSHA Federal Occupational Safety & Health Act, 1970
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National s
Association, Incorporated
Practice econwnendation
SPR iF Simplified Building Code
UBC Uniform
UL Underwriters Laboratories, In,,_
1.23 HANDLING MATERIALS NOT APPROVED
The Contractor shall remove from the site any materials found to
bo damaged, and any materials not meeting the specifications.
These materials shall be removed promptly, unless the Engineer i
will accept the materials after repairing, Materials found to be
damaged, or not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed. t
Inspection before installation shall not relieve the Contractor {
from any responsibility to furnish good quality materials.
1,24 WATER AND POWER FOR CONSTRUCTION
Tho Contractor shall provide at his own expense all water and
electrical power for project construction. The Contractor will make
all necessary arrangements for purchasing and securing all water and
electrical power required for and in connection with the work to be
plarformed including any specified tests of equipment, Jetting back-
01001-7
gg
f
l
fill material or for any other use as may be required for proper
completion of the project. No separate payment for water or
electrical power used or required will be made and all costs in
connection therewith shall be included in the bid price proposal.
} 1.25 LINES AND GRADES 7
All work shall be done to the lines, grades and elevations indicated
on the drawings,
1
basic horizontal and vertical control points will be established or
designated by the Engineer, These points shall be used as datum for
work under this contract. All additional survey, layout, and measure-
ment work shall be performed by the Contractor or part of the work
under this contract.
The Contractor shall provide an experienced instrument man, competent
assistants, and such instruments, tools, stakes, and other materials
as required to complete the survey, layout, and measurement work. In
addition, the Contractor shall furnish, without charge, competent men
from his force and such tools, stakes, and other materials as the
Engineer may require in establishing or designating control points,
or in checking survey, layout, and measurement work performed by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall keep the Engineer, informed, a reasonable time
in advance, of the times and places at which he wishes to do work, so
that horizontal and vertical control points may be established and
any checking deemed necessary by the Engineer may be done with
minimum inconvenience to the Engineer and minimum delay to the
Contractor,
Any work done without being properly located may be ordered removed
and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
k ;
1,26 PRESERVATION OF MONUMENTS AND STAKES j
The Contractor shall carefully preserve all monuments, bench marks,
reference points, and stakes. In case of his destruction thereof,
f the Contractor will be charged with the expense of replacement and
` shalt be responsible for any mistake or loss of the time that may be
caused. Permanent monuments or bench marks which must be removed or
disturbed shall be protected until properly referenced for reloca-
tion, The Contractor shall furnish materials and assistance for the
proper replacement of such monuments or bench marks.
1,27 REVIEW OF ENGINEERING DATA (SHOP DRAWINGS) E
Engineering data covering all equipment and fabricated materials to E
be furnished under this contract shall be submitted to the Consulting
Engineer for review. These data stall include drawings and descrip-
tive information in detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and
01001-8
w
~WW -Imp-
operation of component materials and devices; the external connect-
ions, anchorages, and supports required; performance characteristics;
and dimensions needed for installation and correlation with other
a materials and equipment. Data submitted shall include drawings
showing essential details of any changes proposed by the Contractor
and all required wiring and piping layouts.
` No work shall be performed in connection with the fabrication or
f manufacture of materiels and equipment, nor shall any accessory or
appurtenance be purchased until the drawings and data therefor have
been reviewed, except at the Contractor's own risk and responsi-
billty.
Data and pertinent correspondence shall be routed as follows:
1. Supplier to Contractor (through representative if applicable)
for preliminary check.
I 1
2. Contractor to owner for review and comments,
3. Owner to Contractor.
4. Contractor to Supplier, N
a. Items Requiring Submittal of Engineering Data: Items
requiring submittal as specified above u are not
necessarily limited to the following:
1. Concrete Batch Design
r 2. Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metals
3. Piping, supports and valves
f
4, Electrical and Instrumentation controls
5. Pumps, hoist, motors and other mechanical equipment
6. Access roadway material
7. Fencing
8, Painting
b, Information to be Provided in En ineerin Data: The Con-
irac or s a su mid-s-uTf c ent n orma on to fully
describe the equipment being offered. Failure to supply
sufficient information to evaluate equipment will be cause
for rejectlon. The submittal of Engineering Data shall
include, but not be limited to, the following informations
i
01001-g
1
I. Demonstration of compliance with all
requirements of the specifications including
achievement of the specified minimum design
criteria, i.e., performance curves, material
specifications and all other required data to show
compliance with specifications.
2. Demonstration of compliance with the plan drawings
including material of construction, dimensions,
piping arrangement, external connections,
anchorages, method and sequence of installation and
all other required iata to show compliance with
plan drawings.
3. Exceptions or deviations to the specifications or
plan drawings shall be listed and noted with request
for exception stating reasons and supporting data
for same. i
4. Contractor shall furnish a schedule showing pro-
posed ordering date and delivery date of all items
of equipment and material. These dates shall be
keyed to the progress schedule for the work to show
compliance with contract completion date.
5. A statement of the equipment manufacturer that the J
manufacture of the equipment to be furnished has
been regularly engaged for a period of three years
or more in the production of the specified type of
equipment, or its counterpart.
c. Checking and Review of Engineering Data; The Contractor
s ou check a data or correctness and completeness. +
He will note any exceptions or discrepancies to be
f reviewed or verified by the Engineer. i
The Owner will review the data for general conformity to
the drawings and specifications. He will comme+it on items
1 I called to his attention for review or verification.
Markings will be based on this examination and do not
I constitute a blanket review of substance, fit, or
function.
The owner's review of drawings and data submitted by the
j Contractor will cover only general conformity to the
drawings and specification, external connections, and
dimensions which affect the layout. The Engineer's review
of drawings returned marked NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED or
quantities, and details of the material, equipment, device
or item shown and does not relieve the Contractor from any
responsibility for errors or deviations from the contract
requirements.
01001-10
t
~I
I
I
tf
All drawings and data, after final process by the
Engineer, shall become a part of the contract documents
and the work indicated or described thereby shall be
performed in conformity therewith unless otherwise
authorized by the Owner or the Engineer.
i Copies of all correspondence from the Engineer to the
` Contractor shall be supplied the Owner.
f d. Dis osition of Engineer'n Data: Data which contains
subs an a errors or om salons or which is not clearly
legible may be RE URNED FOR CORRECTION of erroneous
material. Such data will usually be returned unchecked.
Data requiring numerous changes or corrections will be
marked NOT APPROVED REVISE AND RE-SUBMIT, or indicated by
letter and returned for revision. When revised, the data
shall be re-submitted and approved before being distri-
buted for construction.
I Datzi that is acceptable without correction or with only
insignificant corrections will be marked APPROVED and f
distributed for construction and/or manufacture.
Data that does not conform to the drawings or meet the
specifications or fully equal the established standard
will be rejected.
e. Number of Copies ~Required: For data which requires re-
YTFw an a proval,-The ontractor may submit all of the
required number of copies as shown below.
The number of copies required for review and distribution
is.
V
Owner's File 1 ,
Resident Engineer's File 1
rantractur's File 1
Contractor's Field Copy 1
Supplier's Cony 1
Consulting Engineer's File 1
Total .67
To the above number may be added additional copies as
1
required by the Contractor,
END OF SECTION
r
01001-11
1,
_ T
l
I
t: ~ I
i 02201 EARTHWORK.
1.00 GENERAL
i
1.01 SCOPE
The Contractor shall perform all excavation and embankment as may
be necessary for the construction, to line and grade shown on the
` Plans, of all structures, roadways, utilities, and incidentals
thereto. In making excavations, the Contractor shall do all
necessary shoring, bracing, sheeting, pumping and bailing. Where
necessary to determine the location of existing pipes, valves, or
other underground structures, the Contractor, after a careful
examination of available records, shall make all explorations and
excavations for such purpose. Temporary support, adequate
+{m. protection, and maintenance of all underground and surface pipes,
h ' structures and other obstructions encountered in the progress of
the work shall be furnished by the Contractor at his own expense.
4 1.02 EXCAVATION
A. STORAGE
All excavation shall be unclassified and shall include all
materials encountered regardless of their nature or manner in
• which they are removed.
Excavated material to be used for backfill may be deposited
by the Contractor in storage piles at points convenient for
rehandling the material during the backfilling operations.
The location of storage piles shall be subJect to the ap-
proval of the Engineer. i
B. EXCESS EARTH }
Excess earth from the var-',js excavations, which is not
A' required fog' backfill on the plant site, shall be disposed of
by the Contractor at locations to be arranged for by the
Contractor. a
' 2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. CONCRETE FOR BACKFILL, BLOCKING, CRADLING AND ENCASEMENT ,
i
All concrete used for these purposes shall be 1500 psi as
specified in Section 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE, {
02201-1
B. SELECT MATERIAL
A non-expansive soil with sufficient permeability charac-
teristics to allow rapid elimination of seepage water shall
( be used to backfill against the walls of the structures
except as otherwise noted,
C. IMPERVIOUS CLAY
Impervious clay material shall have a liquid limit greater
than 30% and plasticity index greater than 15,
D. TOPSOIL
Organic weathered topsoil shall be cleaned of major root ~
systems, weeds, brush and debris.
E. GRANULAR BACKF'ILL MATERIAL
j
Granular backfill as required for backfilling under and adjacent
to structures and for pipe embedment shall be defined as free
!
flowing sandy material which contains no clay and is reasonably
free of organic material, The material shall have a plasticity
index of 9.0 or less and shall meet the following requirements;
Sieve Size Percent Passing
2 inch 100
1 inch 90 - 100 I
No. 40 60 - 100
No. 100 0 - 5
Granular embedment shall not form mud
or muck when wet,
3.00 EXECUTION
r + 3,01 EXCAVATIONS
1 A. STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION
f Excavation shall extend a sufficient distance from walls and
footings to allow for forms, installation of services and for
1 inspection, except where concrete for walls and footings 1s
authorized to be deposited directly against excavated sur-
faces. Where the excavation is made below the elevations
r indicated on the Plans or required herein through the fault
of the Contractor, the excavation shall be restored to the j
proper elevation with lean (1500 psi) concrete at the expense
} of the Contractor,
02201-2
In order that the Engineer may judge the adequacy of the
proposed foundation, the Contractor, if required, shall make
soundings to determine the character of the subgrade mate-
rial. The maximum depth of such soundings will not be
required to exceed five feet below the proposed footing
grade.
The final elevation to which a foundation is to be con-
structed shall be as shown on the Plans or as raised or
lowered by written order from the Engineer when such alte-
rations are Judged proper to satisfactorily comply with the
design requirements for the structure. Should it be found
necessary to change the depth of footings frc,n that shown on
the Plans, the necessary alteration in the details of the
structure shall be accomplished in a manner as directed by i
the Engineer, who shall have the right to substitute revised
details if required.
4
When a structure is to rest on an excavated surface other
than rock, special care shall be taken not to disturb the
bottom of the excavation, and removal of the last material
required to reach foundation final grade shall not be per- -f
formed until Just before the structure is to be placed.
All rock or other hard foundation material shall be free from
all loose material, cleaned, and cut to a firm surface
whether level, stepped, or serrated, as required by the
Plans. All seams shall be cleaned out and filled with
concrete at the time the structure is placed,
B. TRENCH EXCAVATION
Trench excavation comprises excavation for all sewer lines,
miscellaneous lines, and appurtenances for the various types of
lines. All excavations shall be made by open cut to a minimum
` depth of four (4") inches below bottom of pipes, No blasting
will ba allowed. Sides of trenches shall be kept as nearly
vertical as possible, and if required, shall be properly sheeted
and braced. Trenches shall be not less than twelve (12") inches
nor more than twenty-four (24") inches wider than the outside
diameter of the pipe to be laid therein and shall be excavated
true to line so
that
a
clear space on each not less than six (6") inches for pipe fifteen e(15")hinches and
smaller, nine (9") inches for pipe over fifteen (15") inches up
to and including thirty (30") inches and twelve (12") inches for
pipe over thirty (30") inches in diameter, Bell holes shall be
i excavated to insure pipe resting for its entire length on the 1
granular material at the bottom of the trench. Excavation for
manholes and other accessories shall be sufficient to leave at
least twelve (12") inches in the clear between the outer
surfaces and the excavation. Except at locations where rock
excavation fornis the bottoms of the trenches, care shall be
z 02201-3
1
1
!
taken not to excavate below the required depths. Where rock
excavation is required, the rock shall be excavated a minimum
clearance depth of four (4") inches, and backfilled to the
{ required elevation with granular material thoroughly tamped to
ii the satisfaction of the Engineer.
! if unstable founda',ion is encountered, it shall be removed
and replaced with crushed rock to an elevation of four (4")
inches below bottom of pipe, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. I
C. DRILLED PIERS
The Contractor shall do all excavation required for the shafts
through whatever substances countered, to the dimensions and
grades shove on the plans or required by site conditions. Drill
placement shall be such as to insure accuracy of location and
plumbness, to a maximum lateral deviation not to exceed 1-1/?.
~j
and out of plumb deviation not to exceed 1/8" per foot for any
P
portion of the pier, or 1/16" per foot for its entire length, or
2" maximum for depths in excess of 32'. The bottoms shall be
excavated so as to form a bearing area of the required size and
shape shown on the plans. Where changes in length of shafts
are required they shall be made as directed by the Engineer.
The spoils from the pier excavation shall not be allowed to
build up around the shaft opening, Excavated materials shall
be removed from the area during the drilling operation. At the
completion of drilling the area adjacent to the excavation shall
be cleared of spoils for a distance of 4' in every direction and
the top of the shaft shall be chamfered 6" at its periphery.
Where free ground water is present and/or if caving off of the
wall material, or any probability of caving of the excavation, j
r is evident, the Contractor shall install a temporary steel
casing. Casings shall be of metal and ample strength to with-
stand handling stresses, the pressure of concrete and of the
surrounding earth or backfill materials, and shall be water-
tight. The inside diameter of casing shall not be less than the
nominal size of shaft. Where casings are used the Contractor 1
will be permitted to backfill around casing with pea gravel or
ether materials acceptable to the Engineer in order to allow
`J
ease of casing removal and to reduce excess concrete required to
fill the shaft due to size of casing, Casing shall be seated so
as to sea? off ground water,
If the nature of the overburden is such that very large voids 1
are created by caving of the shaft walls during the drilling I
process, the excavation shall be charged wit11 water and drilling
mud to keep the shaft filled with heavy slush during the drill
operation to firm shale. Insert the casing through the slush
filled pier excavation and seat as necessary to keep out the
ground water, Auger,bucket and pump out water, slush and soils
02201-4
Y
1
1
from the casing interior to provide a dry hole for subsequent
drilling to required penetration.
After shafts are drilled, the holes shall be cleaned of loose
dirt, mud, rock and water. The shaft must be maintained dry
until concrete placement. Concrete shall be placed within S
hours of shaft completion.
The Contractor shall supply suitable lighting and access;
f~
electric drop cords with spot type bulbs, reflectors and guards
therefor, for the Engineer to inspect the completed excavation
and check the dimensions and alignment.
3.02 BACKFILL
A. LEAN CONCRETE BACKFILL
Lean concrete backfill is to be used at the locations shorn
on the Plans, Lean concrete shall be 1500 psi concrete as
specified in Section 03300, CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE.
B. CONCRETE BLOCKING, CRADLE AND ENCASEMENT
Concrete blocking, cradle and encasement shall be 1500 psi
a concrete as specified in Section 03300, CAST IN PLACE
CONCRETE. Blocking shall be placed so as to rest against
firm undisturbed trench walls. The supporting area for each
block shall be at least as great as that indicated on the
Plans and shall be sufficient to withstand the thrust,
including water hammer, which may develop. Each block shall
rest on a firm undisturbed foundation of trench sides and
bottom, Where pipes are placed below structures they shall
be completely encased in 1500 psi concrete, which shall
extend up to bottom of structure as show on the Plans.
C. EMBEDMENT INSTALLATION
All lines shall have a minimum of 4" granular embedment below
the pipe. Granular embedment shall be as specified in para-
graph 2,01E „ GRANULAR BACKFILL MATERIAL, of this specification.
The initial layer of embedment placed to receive the pipe shall
be brought up to a grade slightly higher than that required for
the bottom of the pipe and the pipe shall be placed thereon and
brought to grade by tamping, or by removal of the slight excess
amount of embedment under the pipe. Adjustment to grade line
shall be made by scraping away or filling with embedment
material. Wedging or blocking up of pipe will not be permitted.
Each pipe section shall have a uniform bearing on the embedment
for the length of the pipe, except immediately at the Joint.
Granular embedment shall be used for backfill in the pipe
zone and for a minimum depth of six (6") inches over the
pipe. Embedment shall be jetted or tamped to 95% Standard
# Proctor Density.
l
02201-5
i•
D. BACKFILLING TRENCHES
1. Under Pavement and Within Right-of-Way; All lines
located under paved surfaces or within dedicated street
right-of-way, shall be backfilled completely with gran-
ular embedment material to the top of the trench and
compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density.
2. Outside Paved Areas or Street Right-of-Way: After
sufficient time has elapsed for the free moisture to be
be from the
may gone
either tmped embedment in layers a not t to exceed remaining six b 6k,i11
inches in depth, or if excavated trench material is
r' suitable for jetting, shall be placed in layers not
exceeding three (3') feet in depth and thoroughly
settled by Jetting with water in a manner approved by
the Engineer. After the backfill has reasonably dried
out and settled, it shall be brought to grade and Jetted
a second time. Compaction of the backfill shall be to j
90% Standard Proctor Density, and density tests may be
made as deemed necessary by the Engineer. If such tests
determine that the backfill does not meet this required
density, the Contractor will be required to remove all
the backfill to the point one (1') foot above the pipe
or as required by the Engineer and rebackfilled with
i suitable material until the density required is ob-
tained.
J
E, BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES J,
After completion of foundation footings and walls and other
construction below the elevations of the final grades, all
forms shall be removed and the excavation cleaned of any
trash, debris or other objectionable matter prior to back-
filling.
` Contractor shall secure the approval of the Engineer prior to
J placing backfill around any of the structures. Contractor
shall be responsible for settlement, and shall restore
I surfaces should any settlement. occur.
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the plans, select
material meeting the requirements of paragraph 2,01B, SELECT
MATERIAL, of this specification shall be used to backfill
structures, The material shall be placed in layers approxi-
mately nine (9") inches in depth, properly moistened to '
approximately optimum requirements, and each layer compacted
{ by machine tampers or other suitable equipment to a density
of 95% Standari Proctor Density. Where pipes, walks, or
other construction is to be placed on or in the backfilled
material, the backfilling shall be done in a thorough manner
to preclude after-settlement,
02201-5
I
The select material backfill shall be brought u to eighteen
(18") inches below finished grade. p A 1.0-foot layer of impervious clay (from six (6") inches to
eighteen (18") inches below finished grade) shall be com-
pacted in place for the full width of the original excavation
from the side of the structure.
F. TOPSOIL
All areas which have been excavated but do not receive paved
surfaces shall receive six (6") inches of topsoil unless
f otherwise shown on the Plans. The six (6") inches of topsoil
I shall be dumped in separate piles and uniformly distributed
by blade, grader or other suitable equipment. Topsoil shall
( not be placed when the ground is frozen or excessively wet.
Each layer or layers shall be compacted to a density approxi-
mately that of undisturbed topsoil adjacent to the site,
3,03 FINISHING AND CLEAN-UP
All areas which do not receive any type of paved surface, shall be
' graded as shown on the Plans and raked smooth and even so that
s' they will drain generally away from the structures toward the
roads and streets or the natural drainage course. All clods of
,I earth shall be broken up and no rocks, trash or debris shall
remain on or near the surface of the finished grade,
3.04 CRUSHED ROCK ROAD
i
A 6 crushed rock surfaced roadway shall be constructed as shown on
the plans and as hereinafter specified.
A. CRUSHED ROCK
Crushed rock shall consist of crusher-run broken stone mixed
with binding material and complying with the following
requirements.
When properly slaked and tested by standard Texas Highway
Department laboratory methods, the flexible base material shall i
meet the following requirements:
Retained on 1-3/4" sieve 0%
Retained on 1" sieve . . . , . , 5 to 25%
Retained on 112" sieve . . , . , , . , . , 30 to 50%
Retained on No. 4 sieve . . . , . , , . . 45 to 65`b
Retained on No. 40 sieve . . . , . . , . 70 to 80%
02201-7
v
Material passing the No. 40 sieve shall be known as "Soil
Binder" and shall meet the following requirements when prepared
in accordance with Test Method Tex-101-E procedure:
The liquid limit shall not exceed . , . . 40
The plasticity index shall not exceed 10
The material shall have a Wet Bali Mill Value not exceeding 40
When tested in accordance with Texas Highway Department Stan'da`rd
laboratory test Tex-116-E. Unless otherwise shown on plans the
increase in soil binder resulting from this test shall not
exceed 20.
0. CONSTRUCTION
The roadbed shall be shaped in conformity with the typical
section shown on the plans, with grades generally conforming to
the existing grade of the ground surface. The material shall be
placed on the subgrade, wetted and compacted to 95% Standard
Proctor Density and rolled to a smooth and uniform finish.
Final rolling shall be done with a flat wheel or pneumatic
roller.
3.05 STONE AGGREGATE FILL AND SOIL STERILIZATION `
The Contractor shall lay a 3-inch stone aggregate fill over finish
graded areas between structures and the fence. Aggregate shall be
j laid after all construction operations are finished and after finish
grading is completed and approved by the Engineer. There shall be no
sumps to retain water and finish aggregate elevations shall be the
finish contours shown on the Plans. Prior to laying the aggregate
the entire soil surface shall have been sterilized and shall have an
IE overlay of polyethylene sheeting. All polyethylene sheeting shall be
6 mil thickness and black. Sheets of polyethylene sheeting shall be
r' lapped 12 inches minim.~m.
Aggregate shall be crushed limestone conforming to ASTM designation
0-448-71, size number sixty seven (67). One hundred percent shall
pass a I inch square sieve, 90-100 percent a 3/4 inch sieve,
20-55 percent a 3/8 inch sieve and 0-10 percent a No. 4 sieve
(4.75mm).
The entire area to have stone aggregate fill shall be sterilized by
application of Monsanto Round Up, evenly spread and generally
applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. After
i sterilant is applied, the polyethylene sheeting shall be installed.
END OF SECTION
3
,
02201-8
'j
,
i
I`
l
I
,
02444 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES
1.00 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish and install or reinstall chain link
fencing to the dimensions as shown on the Plans. The fence shall be
similar and equal to that of the Cyclone Fence Division of U.S. Steel
Company.
h' The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete shop
drawings in accordance with Section 1001, Paragraph 1.27, SHOP
DRAWINGS. Shop drawings shall include a complete description of all
material offered including details, illustrating fence height, sizes +1
of posts, rails, braces, gates, etc.
t w
Work shall also include the installation of 3 strands of barbed wire
on 450 extension arms for the entire fence and gate.
2.00 PRODUCTS
,
The chain link fabric shall be 6 foot width, 9 gauge, aluminum-
coated steel chain link wire, woven in a 2" mesh. Top and bottom
salvages shall be knuckled.
The top rail shall be 1-5/8" O.D. galvanized pipe, weight 2,27
pounds per foot, with outside sleeve type couplings at least 7"
V long. Fabric shall be tied to the top rail at 24" centers with 9
gauge aluminum wire, Line posts shall be galvanized 2" H-column,
weight 2.72 pounds per foot, or 2-1/2" O.D., weight 3.65 pounds
F per foot, Schedule 40 galvanized pipe, spaced not to exceed 10
n feet. Fabric shall be tied to line posts with 6 gauge galvanized 3
clips on 14" centers. Terminal posts at ends and corners pull
posts shall be 3" O,D. galvanized pipe, weight 5,79 pounds per
foot. These posts shall be equipped with 1/4" x 3/4' tension
bars, 11 gauge x 1" wide tension bands, and 3/8" carriage bolts,
bands on approximately 14" centers. Gate posts for the 4'-0"
gates shall be 2-3/8" Schedule 40 galvanized pipe. Bottom tension
wire shall be No, 7 galvanized or aluminum coated spring coil or
tension wire which shall hold fabric in proper alignment and be
resilient so as to restore alignment when fabric is deflected.
The gates shall have posts as specified above, with a frame of 2"
O.D. galvanized pipe. Corner fittings shall be heavy malleable
cast fittings. Hinges shall allow gates to swing 90° outward,
The gates shall be complete with a padlocking device, catches and
stops.
3.00 EXECUTION
3 The fence shall be installed by skilled and experienced fence
erectors and on lines and grades established by the Engineer. All
02444-1
1
line posts shall be set in concrete a minimum of 9" in diameter
and 36" deep. Gate posts shall be set in concrete a minimum of
12" in diameter and 36" deep. The complete fence shall be as such /
J to discourage tampering with all connections and ends secured as
s to prevent easy removal, or disconnecting.
This item shall include the removal and reconstruction of the
existing fence at the locations shown on the Plans or where deemed
necessary by the Engineer. The Contractor shall exercise caution
in removing and salvaging the materials so they may be used in
reconstructing the fence. The reconstructed fence shall be equal
in every way, or superior, to the fence removed. The Contractor
F shall be responsible for any damage or injury sustained by persons,
livestock or property on account of any act or omission, neglect or
misconduct of his, his agents, employees, or subcontractors (during
construction operations and while removing and relocating the fence).
Barbed wire shall be installed on supporting arms above the fence
posts, with each strand pulled taut and securely fastened to each M
` supporting arm, The end member of gate frames shall be extended
sufficiently above the top member to carry strands of barbed wire in
horizontal alignment with barbed wire strands on the fence.
END OF SECTION
i
i
M
1
1
1
1
02444-2
' 02529 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
1.00 GENERAL
I"
This item will consist of concrete sidewalks and driveways
f constructed as herein specified and in conformity with the lines
and grades as established by the Engineer, and the details as
shown on the plans.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. CONCRETE
r; Concrete used in construction under this item shall conform
to the requirements for Class "A" Concrete as specified in
Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
0. REINFORCING
1. REINFORCING STEEL {
Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements as
specified in Section 03200, CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT. 1
2. WIRE MESH
Wire mesh shall conform to the requirements as specified
in Section 03200, CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT.
C. EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL )
r ) Expansion Joint filler and joint sealant material shall
conform to the requirements as specified in Section 03300,
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRF.TE.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A. GENERAL
Concrete sidewalks will have a minimum thickness of five (5) I
inches except sidewalks constructed in driveway sections will
have a minimum thickness of six (6) inches within the limits
of the driveway. All concrete driveways will have a minimum
thickness of six (6) inches. Standard slope for walks will
be one-quarter (1/4) inch per foot in the direction of the
curb or street.
{
02529-1
r
9. EXCAVATION AND GRADING
The subgrade or foundation shall be excavated and shaped to
line, grade and section as shown on the plans or as directed
by the Engineer. The subgrade or foundation material shall
be sprinkled lightly immediately before concreting.
After the fine grading has been completed, a two (2) inch
layer of sand or suitable gravel cushion shall be evenly
spread over the subgrade for sidewalks and driveways, tho-
roughly wetted, and tamped into place to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. The forms shall be placed upon this and or
gravel base.
C. FORMS
Forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to
the Engineer, straight, free from warp and a depth equal to
the thickness of the finished work. They shall be securely
staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position
during the depositing of concrete.
D. REINFORCING
f
The reinforcing steel or wire mesh, as specified, shall be
placed in position as shown on the plans. Care shall be
exercised to keep all reinforcing in its proper locations.
E. EXPANSION JOINTS
Expansion Joints for sidewalks and driveways shall be formed ,
using premolded expansion Joint material as specified herein,
Expansion Joints shall be placed in the sidewalk at thirty-
six (36) foot intervals or as otherwise specified by the
Engineer. Expansion Joints shall also be placed at all
r abutting structures such as concrete driveways, curbs,
buildings, other sidewalks and retaining walls, etc. All
expansion Joints shall be one-half (1/?,} inch in thickness,
and shall be sealed.
Sidewalks shall be "flagged" at intervals equal to the width
of the walk with a marking tool,
i
F. PLACING AND FINISHING
a
Concrete shall be placed in the forms to the depth specified
and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar
entirety covers the surface.
1 Concrete sidewalks and driveways shall be finished to a true,
even surface, They shall be troweled with a steel trowel and
02529-2
.r
3y
r then brushed transversely to obtain a smooth uniform brush
finish.
The edges of all construction and expansion Joints and the
outer edges of all sidewalks shall be finished to approx-
imately a one-half (1/2) inch radius with a sui
ing tool. table finish-
G. CURING
The completed sidewalks and driveways shall be cured in
accordance with the requirements of MEMBRANE CURING as
specified in Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. Other
methods of curing as outlined herein will be acceptable with
a required curing period of seventy-two (72) hours,
}
END OF SECTION
t
1 ~
i
k
~ R
r
s
02529-3
02622 POL LVItYL -CHLORIDE PIPE AND FITTINGS
1.00 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish and install all unplasticized poly-
vinyl chloride (PvC) pipe and fittings, including connertions and
appurtenances as shown on the Plans and specified herein.
2.00 PRODUCTS
~i
2,01 MATERIALS
A. GRAVITY PIPE 4"-15" {
All PVC pipe and fittings for diameters not exceeding fifteen r`
(15") inches shall meet the extra strength requirements of ASTM
Specification D3034-latest revision and shall comply with the
g<r standards of the UNI-Bell Plastic Pipe Association Specification
UNI-3-4. Minimum wall dimension ratio shall be SDR 35 as
Q~; c follows:
dY Pie Size Outside Diameter '
Min. Wall Thickness
4 4.215" +0.007
6 6.275" 70,009 0,1
x.180
0
14 8.400 +0.240 0.240
12 10.500" +0,013 U,300
15 12.500" +`0.016 0.360"
s
15,300" +0.021 0,44010 i
8. GRAVITY PIPE 18"-27" t
All PVC pipe and fitting;; for diameters eighteen (18") inch
to twenty-seven (27") inch shall meet or exceed the perfor-
mance requirements of ASTM Specification F 679-80, UNI-Bell
Plastic Pipe Association Specification UNI-B-7 and ASTM
D3034. Minimum wall dimension ratio of solid wall pipe
shall be SDR 35 as follows;
Pipe Size Outside Diameter
Min. Wa11 Thickness r
~18"
28 18.701 r „ s
22.047" .~36
24 01
24.803" •632
11,
x 27" 27.953" ,'l ,8011
1
Spiral wound PVC sewer pipe shall meet the same performance
standards.
L
02622-1
1
i
2.02 JOINTS
The pipe shall be jointed with an integral bell, bell and spigot type
rubber gasketed joint. Each integral Joint shall consist of a formed
bell ur spigot complete with a single rubber gasket. All pipe shall
have a home mark on the spigot to indicate proper penetration when
the Joint is made. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477. Joints shall
have to be tested in accordance with ASTM 03212.
2.03 FITTINGS
All fittings and accessories shall be manufactured and furnished
k by the pipe manufacturer or approved equal and have bell and/or
spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. j
The deflection test shall consist of running a mandrel thru each
section of pipe, between manholes. Any section of pipe not allowing
passage of a properly sized mandrel shall be rejected. Deflection
testing will not be made until all backfill compaction or
water-getting requirements have been met.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 RECEIVING, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Care shall be used in unloading and handling to avoid cuts and
abrasions to tlie pipe. PVC pipe and fittings must be stored to be
protected from prolonged heat or direct sunlight. Any protective
covering may be used which will not absorb much heat and which
will reflect direct rays of the sun. Ventilation should be pro- I
vided with any type of cover used.
I {
3.02 LAYING PIPE
Pipe shall be laid in accordance with the manufacturer's in-
structions. Fifteen inch and smaller PVC pipe shall be installed 1
according to ASTM 02321. This includes making sure that the bell
and spigot is clean, and that the spigot is inserted the pre-
scribed amount to allow for expansion and contraction due to the
temperature change. Joint lubrication shall be used as recom-
mended.
3.03 MANHOLE CONNECTIONS 1
1
Where PVC pipe extends through a rigid manhole wall, it must be
recognized that concrete and mortar will not bond to the PVC pipe,
and as a result some form of special wall fitting must be provided
as leakage around the pipe through the manhole wall will not be
y acceptable. A. ring water stop as an integral part of the wall
fitting or a comparable water stop shall be provided.
02622-2
1
3,04 TRENCH AND 6ACKFILL
Trenching and backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 02201,
EARTHWORK.
3.05 PLUGS {
Open ends of pipe shall be effectively plugged any time pipe
laying is stopped. Stub outs from m~.riholes for future connections
shall be plugged,
3.06 PIPE TESTING
i
All PVC sewer lines shall be tested for leakage by the pneumatic air
test.
3.07 INSPECTION
checked b the r
Each load of pipe delivered to the job site will b. by
Engineer to assu,-e that it meets specifications. When a load of
pipe is found to have inadequate wall thickness or tolerances
greater than specified, randomly selected samples of the pipe
shall be immediately forwarded to an approved testing laboratory
with instructions to check the pipe for compliance with applicable
product standards, ASTM Specifications and other specifications
for the specific contract. When the testing laboratory reports {
concur that the pipe does not meet the specifications, it is to be
understood that all of the pipe delivered to the site will be
immediately removed and replaced by the Contractor at no addi-
tional cost to the Owner,
f
END OF SECTION
t 1
r
r
• 02622-3
y
I
02647 CONCRETE SEWER MANHOLES
1.00 GENERAL
This section covers standard and special manholes and cleanouts
for the sanitary sewer. Manholes shall be constructed complete
with covers, fittings, and other appurtenances, in accordance with
` the details indicated on the drawings using cast-in-place concrete
r or precast concrete.
2,00 MATERIAL (SEE EXECUTION BELOW)
t'
3.00 EXECUTION
C 3.01 MANHOLE BASE
As applicable, the details shown on the Plans shall apply. All
a
manhole bases, or footings, shall be poured with 3000 psi con-
crete.
Where manholes are on a straight run of pipe, the footing shall be
poured and the pipe shall be laid through the manhole. After
walls of the manhole are in place, concrete shall be filled-in
around the pipe in accordance with the Plan details.
The concrete portion of all inverts within manholes shall be given
a smooth steel trowel finish.
The first section of pipe extending out a minimum of 24 inches
from each side of manhole shall be supported in concrete as part
of the manhole base.
3.02 MONOLIIHIC MANHOLES
Monolithic concrete manholes shall be poured on the job site using
specially designed, re-usable plastic or metal forms. Manholes
shall be poured from 3000 psi concrete to provide a formed wall
thickness of at least 8 ink,hes. Monolithic manholes shalt be
substantially watertight when completed. Bases, or footings, for
} these manholes shall be as described above.
3.03 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
j Precast, reinforced concrete manholes shall be as fabricated by
Gifford-Hill cr approved equal. Precast sections shall comply
with ASTM C76, Class 11, Wall B. Manhole components in other
respects shall comply with ASTM C-478, Joints in the precast
manhole sections shall be sealed against leakage with a preformed
7 plastic material as distributed by the K. T. Snyder Co. of
Houston, under the trade name of "Ram-Nec,"
02647-1
;y l
1
I 3.04 MANHOLE RINGS AND COYER
Manhole rings and covers shall be made of gray iron castings, ASTM
• A48, and shall conform to Class No. 30,
The general dimensional requirements for the Standard manhole ring
and cover shall be as follows:
Diameter of lid 24"
Thickness of lid at edge 1-7/811 ~
Clear opening in frame 22-1/2
Total depth of frame 5-1/4"
Depth of lid seat in frame 2"
i` Outside diameter of frame at bottom 32"
f " Width of frame flange at bottom 4-3/4"
The ring and cover shall be Western Iron Works, San Angelo, Stock
No, 42, Trinity Valley Iron and Stec;l Company Pattern No. 672, j
having a weight of 300 pounds, the equivalent pattern as produced
" by McKinley Iron Works of Fort Worth, Texas, or approved equal.
r Lids shall be interchangeable, and adaptable to all other rings of
this pattern. The accuracy of the castings shall be such that the I y
lid will have full bearing on the seat ring, and will not rattle
under traffic. All castings shall be clean and sound, and free of
blow or sand holes and other defects.
The top of manhole ring shall be accurately set to grade by use of
2" x 8' precast concrete rings (ASTM C-478) or brick, grouted in
place with 1:2 mortar; use minimum of 4 rings in streets and
paved areas and two rings at other locations.
3.05 MANHOLE STEPS
Non-metal IIc manhole steps shall be "Perma-Step" as manufactured
by Utility Products, Inc., 8618 Broadway, San Antonio, Texas, "ICM
Manhole Steps" as manufactured by Improved Construction Methods,
Inc., P. 0. Box 585, Jacksonville, Arkansas, or steps of equal
quality. Spacing of steps shall be as indicated on the Plans.
3.06 STUBOUTS AT MANHOLES
For future sewer extensions, provide the length of pipe stubout of
4 ! the pipe size and invert elevation at base of manholes and at lo-
cations as indicated on Plans, Expense of these stubouts including
permanent type water tight end closure and concrete cradle therefor
shall be included as a part of the price quoted for the complete
project.
3.07 DROP MANHOLES
It is intendea that a drop manhole piping assembly be installed in
all cases where the distance between the incoming pipe and the
i
02647-2
R
E '
i
floor of the manhole is three feet or more. The drop assembly
shall be encased in concrete as shown on the Plans.
END OF SECTION
l
r
a
r
1
s
G.
i
1
0?.647-3
.
a .f'..'
11' 4 .`1
1
1 1
fi
{f
1
03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK
e
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
The work covered by this item consists of furnishing all material
and tabor required for forming, tieing, bracing and supporting the
wet concrete, the reinforcing steel and all embedded items until
the concrete has developed sufficient strength to permit form
removal.
N 1.02 GOVERNING STANDARDS
s ~Yr kY 5 j - _
+ All forming materials, accessories and their use shall conform to
the requirements of:
AC1-347 Concrete Formwork
American Concrete Institute,
P. 0. Box 19150, Redford Station
Detroit, Michigan 48219
AISC Manual of Steel Construction
American Institute of Steel Construction
400 North Michigan Avenue
` Chicago, Illinois 60611
AISI Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual
American Iron and Steel Institute
New York, New York
2,00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
I
A. LUMBER i
All lumber for forms and falsework shall be properly seasoned
i and of good quality. It shalt be free from loose or unsound
knots, knot holes, twists, shakes, decay, splits, and other
imperfections which would affects its strength or impair the
finished surface of the concrete. The lumber used for facing
or sheathing shall be surfaced on at least one side and two
edges, and shall be sized to uniform thickness, Lumber of
nominal one-inch thickness or plywood of 3/4-inch thickness
will be permitted for general use on structure if backed by a
sufficient number of studs and wales.
j
'a
r
03100-1
1
J
B. FORM LINING
Timber forms for exposed concrete surfaces which are to be
1 given a rubbed finish, shall be facelined with an approved
type of form lining material. If plywood is used for form
lining, it shall be made with water-proof adhesive, shall
1 have a minimum thickness of one-fourth inch, and preferably
I shall be oiled at the mill and then re-oiled or lacquered on
the job before using. If fiber board is used it shall be
tempered Vosonite Concrete Form Presdwood, having a minimum
thickness of three-slxteenths inch and shall be thoroughly
wet with water at least 12 hours before using. The water
1`I shall be applied to the screen side of the board and the
boards shall be stacked screen side to screen side. The
smooth hard face shall be used as the contact surface of the
form.
If desired by the Contractor, such surfaces may be formed
with three-fourths inch thick plywood made with water-proof
r adhesive backed with adequate studs and wales, keeping in
mind that the greatest strength of the outer plies should be
at right angles to the studding, and in this case, form
lining will not be required.
Edges and faces of adJacent panels shall be carefully aligned
and the joints between panels shall be filled with patching
plaster or cold water putty to prevent leakage, and sanded
lightly with No. 0 sandpaper to make the joints smooth.
Forms which are being reused shall have all unused form tie
hales filled and smoothed as described above so as to be
perfectly smooth.
i
C. SPECIAL FORM LUMBER
w 1. Molding specified for chamfer strips or other uses shall
be mado of redwood, cypress, or pine materials of such
grade that will not split when nailed and which can be
maintained to a true line without warping. The molding
shall be mill cut and dressed on all faces. Where
shown on the plans, forms shall be filleted at sharp
corners, both inside and outside, and at edges, with
triangular chamfer strips. The strips shall be of sizes
indicated. All chamfer strips shall be thoroughly oiled
before installation on forms.
I
2. Forms for railings and ornamental work shall be con-
structed to standards equivalent to first class mill
work. All moldings, panel work, and bevel strips shall
be straight and true with neatly mitered Joints and of
such design that the finished work shall be true, sharp, I
and clean-cut.
03100-2
D. CARTON FORMS
Carton forms of corrugated fibreboard shall be used for slab
{ and grade beam construction on drilled piers for buildings
where shown on the plans.
h Carton forms shall be corrugated fibreboard void forms as
fabricated and distributed by Savway Carton Forms, Inc.,
Dallas, Texas, and shall be not less than 6" in depth. Forms
shall be impregnated throughout with paraffin and laminated
with water resistant adhesive. Forms shall be designed to
support the concrete loads plus a normal construction load.
Fibreboard void forms are to be installed according to the
manufacturers recommendations and in dry condition when 1
w ; concrete is poured.
E. METAL FORMS
The foregoing specifications for "Forms" as regards design,
t+" mortar-tightness, filleted corners, beveled
bracing, alignment, removal, reuse, oiling,pandewetting
shall apply equally to metal forms. The metal used for forms
4r shall be of such thickness that the forms will remain true to
shape. All bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall
be countersunk. Clamps, pins, or other connecting devices
shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to
allow removal without Injury to the concrete. Metal forms
which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly
shall not be used. Special care shall be exercised to keep
metal free from rust, grease, or other foreign material such a I
as will tend to discolor the concrete.
F. PAN/SLIP FORMS }
1 r
{ Pan/Slip Forms, when required, shall meet all of the apply-'
cable portions of this specification.
' G. FORM TIES
r 'r
Metal form ties of a type approved by the Engineer shall be
used to hold forms in place. Such ties shall have provision
to permit ease of removal of the metal as hereinafter specs-
fled. The use of wire form ties will not be ermftted except
by approva o e n-1 gineer; me a appliances `used
inside of the forms to hold them in correct alignment shall
be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch from the
surface of the concrete and shall be so constructed that
metal may be removed without undue Injury to the surface from
chipping or spalling. Such devices, when removed, shall
leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface not larger
t
03100_3
{
1
. 1
than seven-eighths inch in diameter. Burning off of rods,
bolts, or ties will not be permitted. Metal ties shall be
held in place by devices attached to wales. Each device
shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie.
j Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms
shall be wired to top of form and shall be entirely removed
as the concrete is being placed. Where wire ties are
ti.
' permitted, all wires shall he cut back at least one-half inch
from the face of the concrete with a sharp chisel or nippers.
The use of metal form ties of a type that are encased in
paper or other material to allow the removal of complete tie,
leaving a hole through the concrete structure, will not be
permitted in the construction of basement or water bearing
walls.
H. FORM OIL
The oil used for this purpose shall be a light clear oil
which will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the
concrete surface or delay or impair curing operations.
2.02 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
A. DESIGN LOADS
1
Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid
weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot. The rate of placing the
concrete, temperature of the concrete, and whether the
concrete is vibrated or not, shall be taken into conside-
ration in determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. An r
additional live load of 50 pounds per square foot shall be i
allowed on horizontal surfaces. The maximum unit stresses
shall not ,meed 125 percent of the allowable stresses used
for the design of structures.
B. ALIGNMENT CONTROL
True alignment of walls and other vertical surfaces having
straight lines or rectangular shapes shall be controlled by
the following procedure: Forming shall be arranged with
provisions for adjusting the horizontal alignment of a form i
7 after the form has been filled with concrete to grade, using
wedges turnbuckles, or other approved adjustment methods. ' k
}
The general procedure will be to establish a transit line or
` I other .3 roved reference such that adjustments can be made to
an estappblished line while the concrete in the top of the form
is still plastic. Adjusting facilities shall be at intervals
which will permit adjustments to a straight line. The
Contractor shall be responsible for this alignment check, and
shall furnish his own personnel for such checking and adjust-
ment. Tolerance for the adjustment shall be subject to the
place. pouring
until Engineor approval. No fos will be
adjusting facilities are approved
03100-4
A
i
t,
C. FALSEWORK
All falsework shall be designed and constructed so that no
S excessive settlement or deformation will occur, and so that
the necessary rigidity will be provided.
All timber used in falsework centering shall be sound, in li
good condition, and free from defects which will impair its
strength. Steel members shall be of adequate strength and of
such shape as to be suitable for the purpose intended.
Timber piling may be of any species of wood which will
withstand driving satisfactorily and which will adequately
support the superimposed load.
Where sills or timber grillages are used to support falsework
columns, such sills and grillages, unless founded on solid
;t rock, shale or other hard materials shall be placed in
excavated pits and backfilled to prevent the softening of the
supporting material by drip from the forms or by rains that
may occur during the construction process. Sills or grill-
ages shall be of ample size to support the superimposed load
without settlement. Falsework which cannot be founded on a
satisfactory spread footing shall be supported on piling
which shall be driven to a bearing capacity sufficient to
support the superimposed load without settlement.
9 3.00 EXECUTION
l 3,01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ,
A. FORM WORK
Forms shall be built mortar-tight and of material sufficient
in strength to prevent bulging between supports. They shall
be set and maintained to the lines designated until the
concrete is sufficiently hardened to permit form removal.
During the elapsed time between the building of the forms and
the placing of the concrete, the forms shall be maintained in
a manner to eliminate warping and shrinking. If, at any
i stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagg-
ing, that portion of the concrete causing such condition
shall be immediately removed, if necessary, and the forms
shall be reset and securely braced against further movement.
Forms or form lumber to be reused shall be maintained clean
and in good condition as to accuracy, shape, strength,
rigidity, tightness, and smoothness of surface. All forms
shall be so constructed as to permit removal without damage
ti to the concrete. Particular and special care must be
exercised in framing forms for copings, offsets, railing, and
all ornamental work, so that there will be no damage to, or
i marring of, the concrete when the forms are removed, When-
f
03100-5
'j
1
41
ever practicable, forms shall be erected complete before the
reinforcement is placed. For narrow walls and other loca-
tions where access to the bottom of the forms is not other-
wise readily attainable, adequate cleanout openings shall be
1 provided.
B. EMBEDDED ITEMS
Before placing concrete, care shall be taken to determine
that all embedded items are firmly and securely fastened in
place as indicated in the drawings or required by the Engi-
neer. All embedded items shall be thoroughly clean and free
of oil and other foreign material. Anchor bolts shall be set
to exact locations by the use of suitable anchor bolt tem-
plates, or as otherwise shown on the plans.
Ir C. PLACING REI!'17ORCEMENT M
Reinforcement in concrete structures shall be carefully and
accurately placed and rigidly supported as provided in the
Item "Concrete Reinforcement".
j D. WETTING AND OILING FORMS
The facing of all forms shall be treated with a suitable form
oil before concrete is placed. In hot weather, both sides of
the face forms may be required to be treated with oil to
prevent warping and to secure tight Joints. The oil shall be
applied before the reinforcement is placed. In general, all
surfaces of forms which will come in contact with the con-
Crete shall be wetted immediately before the concrete is
I placed.
E. CLEANING FORMS
At the time of placing concrete, the forms shall be clean and
entirely free from all chips, dirt, sawdust, and other ex-
traneous matter. Forms for slab, beam and girder construc-
tion shall not have tie wire cuttings, nails, matches or any
other matter whatsoever which would mar the appearance of the
finished construction. All forms shall be cleaned to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, and kept free of foreign matter i
of all kinds during concrete placing.
C F. ENGINEERS APPROVAL
j The Contractor shall notify the Engineer upon completion of
various portions of the work required for placing concrete so
that inspection may be made as early as is practicable.
When all items have been found to be in order, the Engineer
will authorize the contractor to proceed with the placement.
03100-6
+i
,
3,02 REMOVAL OF FORMS
P
Forms shall be removed in such a manner that the underlying
concrete surface is not marred or damaged In any way. Forms may
be removed in not less than the number of curing days set forth in
the following table:
Forms and falsework under slabs, beams and girders
where deflections due to dead load moment may exist
p 7 days
s.;. Forms for walls, columns, sides of piers, massive
structural components and other ,nembers not re-
n sisting a bending moment during cuing I da,~
Forms for concrete of minor structural load y
carrying importance 1 day
END OF SECTION
r
f
s ~
s
03100-7
I1 ~ ;
1
r
1
I
r
0320_ 0 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
1,00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
The work coverid by this item consists of furnishing all the
reinforcing materials and labor required for cutting, bending,
tieing, splicing,
placing and supporting the reinforcement in the
material grades, sizes, quantities and locations as shown on the
W plans.
1.02 GOVERNING STANDARDS
All reinforcing materials and the cutting, bending, tieing,
splicing, placing and supporting of same shall be in compliance
with the following listed standards unless otherwise noted in the
.Y Contract Documents. The publications listed below are from;
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race st.
tt s;y Philadelphia, Pa. 19143.
ACI American Concrete Institute, P.O, Box 19150, Redford
: Station, Detroit, Michigan 48219.
r,r CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, 180 N. LaSalle
St., Chicago, Ill. 60601.
r
AWS - American Welding Society, Inc., 550 N.W. LeJeune, P, 0. Box
351040, Miami, Fla, x3135.
Other specifications and Proprietary "Iems are as noted.
The Contractor shall maintain one (1) copy of each of the ap-
plicable standards at the construction field office or job site. '
`ASTM-A82
Standard Specification for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for 1
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM-A185 Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric
ASTM-A615 Concrete Reinforcement
Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-
ACI-315 Steil Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced
' Concrete Structures
ACI-318 B!!ilding Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
AWS-D1.4
CRSI Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel
Manual of standard practice
03200-1
1
a
j
J
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. STORAGE
Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the '
ground upon platfonn skids, or other supports and shall be
protected as far as practicable from mechanical Injury and
surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions ;
producing rust. When placed in the work, it shall be free
from dirt, scale, dust, paint, oil and other foreign mate-
rial. All steel reinforcement shall be tagged and stored for
ease of correlation with shop drawings.
2.00 PRODUCTS ,
2,01 MATERIALS
A. BARS
All bar reinforcement shall conform to Deformed Billet-Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, ASTM Designation A-615.
Unless otherwise specified, bars shall be Grade 60 with a
minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi.
B. WIRE FABRIC
Wire for fabric reinforcement shall be Cold-Drawn steel wire
( conforming to the requirements for Cold-Drawn Steel Mire for
4 Concrete Reinforcement, ASTM Designation A-82, and Fabricated
in accordance with ASTM Designation A-185.
I
C. SUPPORTS
I
{ Bar supports or chairs shall be furnished in accordance with
the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Standard +r
Practice, Bar supports which will be used in slabs or beams i
which will have a rubbed finish on the bottom side shall have I
uniform high density polyethylene tips on the legs. The tips
shall be approximately 1/4-inch thick between the ends of the
chair legs and the form, and shall be as manufactured by
Plastichair or equal.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. BENDING
The reinfoi,cement shall be bi;nt cold by machine tu shapes
indicated on the Plans. Bends shall be true to shapes
indicated, and irregularities in bending shall be cause for
rejection. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, all Hook and
Bend Details and Tolerances shall conform to the requirements
of ACI-315 and ACI-3'18, j
,
i .
03200-2
iy„ ,
I
r
i
B. SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor or the Supplier shall prepare and submit
detailed shop drawings for each detail of the general plans
requiring the use of reinforcing steel. Each sheet shall
have a title. The shop drawings shall be submitted in
duplicate for the review of the Engineer. After review and
making any necessary corrections, six (6) copies of the shop
drawings shall be submitted for final approval. The approved
' shop drawings will be distributed as follows;
- Contractor i - Supplier
~1 _ Owner
L
The Shop Drawings shall conform to the recommendations of
' ACI-315.
3.00 EXECUTION
3,01 GENERkL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER
No concrete shall be deposited until the Engineer has in-
spected and approved the placing of the reinforcing steel and
given permission to place concrete. Exposed reinforcing
steel intended for bonding with future extensions shall be
effectively protected from corrosion.
B. SPLICES
Lap Splices: No splicing of bars, except when shown on r
R the Plans, will be permitted without the written
approval of the Engineer, Approval of bar bending
schedules or of placing trawings will constitute written
approval. Lap splices which are permitted shall have a
lap in accordance with the table of Tension Bar-Laps and ,
Embedment lengths as shown on the Plans. The bars shall
be rigidly clamped or wired at all splices in a manner
approved by the Engineer. Sheets of wire fabric shall
overlap each other sufficiently to maintain a uniform
strength and shall be securely fastened.
2• Welded Splices: Welding of reinforcing steel is not !
permitted without the written approval of the Engineer.
When permitted, the welding must be done in compliance
with the requirements of AWS-D12.1,
3. Mechanical Splices: Mechanical splices where shown on
the plans or permitted by the Engineer shall be made
using "Cadweld" (or equal) reinforcing bar connectors,
03200-3
I`
j
Installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations, The mechanical device
shall develop the full tensile strength of the bar,
C. TOLERANCES
` All reinforcement shall be placed as shown on the Plans with
j tho following maximum tolerances:
I Cover + 1/8"
Spacings + 3/15" in 12"
D. PLACING
" 1, General: Steel reinforcement shall be placed in the
exact position as shown on the Plans and held securely
in place during the placing of the concrete, The
minimum clear distance between bars shall be two times
the bar diameter. Vertical stirrups shall always pass
around the main tension members and be securely attached
thereto. All reinforcing shall be wired together at a
sufficient number of intersections to produce a sound or ~
sturdy mat or cage of reinforcement that will maintain
the reinforcement in the intended positions when the
concrete is poured. Every 4th intersection is con-
sidered maximum unless otherwise authorized by the
Engineer.
{ 2. Approval: No concrete shall be deposited until the {
Engineer has inspected and approved the placing of the
reinforcing steel and given permission to place con-
crete. Exposed reinforcing steel intended for bonding -1
with future extensions shall be effectively protected
from corrosion,
3. Tieing and Supporting: The reinforcing steel in all ,
i
concrete slabs shall be held firmly in place, as shown '
i on the drawings, by wire supports or "chairs". Wire
"I sizing and spacing of the chairs shall be sufficient to
properly support the steel, and shall be in accordance
with CRSI Manual, "Recommended Prac~'ice for Placing
Bars."
4. Spacers: The reinforcing steel in 1
all
concrete
walls
shall be spaced its proper distance from the face of the i
forms, as shown on the drawings, by means of approved
galvanized metal spacers or approved precast mortar or
concrete blocks. Before any concrete is placed, all
mortar blocks to be used for holding steel in position
adjacent to formed surfaces shall be cast in individual
molds, at which time the blocks shall be immersed in
water for the remainder of at least a four-day curing
period,
03200-4
s
F
The blocks shall preferably that cast with the sides and increases awa fsuch rom hat the size of the block
forms. Blocks in thehforlrface to be placed against the
' vyramid are of a frustum of a cone or
provided in eacheblock foritable tie wires shall be
chon
` s`eel, and to avoid displaceme
ntrwhenthe block to the
concrete, Unless
ng the
Engineer specifically authoriiedcbY the
" , the size of the surface to be
to the foams shall not exceed two and one-hajp f2-112°)
` inches square or the e
x, rectangular areas are provident thereof when circular or
proyided.
cast to the thickness required,a1l 6t and h
surface to be
true plane freelOfesurfaceeImperofections forms Shall be a
t
END OF SECTION
I
03200-5
.5.
i
i
0.
03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
I 1,00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
The work covered by this item consists of furnishing all material,
I mixing and transporting equipment, and performing all labor for the
proportioning, mixing, transporting, placing, consolidating,
finishing and curing of concrete in the structure. Concrete shall
be composed of portl and cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate,
air entraining admixture and water as hereinafter specified.
1.02 GOVERNING STANDARDS
All mixing, sampling, placing, curing and testing of concrete and
the materials used therein shall be in compliance with the later`,
revision of the following listed standards unless otherwise noted
in the Contract Documents, The publications listed below are from:
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race St.,
Philadelphia, Pa. 19103.
ACI - American Concrete Institute, P. 0. Box 19150, Redford
Station, Detroit, Michigan 48219.
CRD - OCE, COE, Dept. of the Army, HQDA Washington, D.C. 20314.
i
Other specifications and proprietary items are as noted. ff
The Contractor shall maintain one (1) copy of each of the app-
livable standards at the construction field office,
ASTM-C31 Making & Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the field
ASTM-C33 Specifications for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM-C39 Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
ASTM-C42 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams
of Concrete
ASTM-C94 Specification for Ready Mix Concrete
ASTM-Ci09 Test for Compressive Strengths of Hydraulic Cement
Mortar
ASTM-C125 Concrete and Concrete Aggregates, Definitions of j
Terms
ASTM-C143 Slump Test
ASTM-GI60 Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM-C156 Test for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials
ASTM-C171 Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM-C172 Sampling Fresh Concrete
ASTM-C173 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method
03300-1
i
r
i
ASTM-C141 Test for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vic at
Needle
! ASTM-C192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory
ASTM-C231 Test for Air Content by Pressure Method
ASTM-C260 Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for
fJ Concrete
ASTM-C293 Test for Flexural Strength of Concrete
ASTM-C309 Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
for Curing Concrete
ASTM-C494 Specifications ;or Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM-C595 Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements -
ASTM-C618 Specification for' Fly Ash and Poazolans for Use with
M Portland Cement
i,. ASTM-CB27 Test for Early Volume Changes of Cementitious
Materials
ASTM-C845 Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement
ASTM-0412 Tests for Rubber Properties
ASTM-D570 Test for Water Absorption of Plastics
ASTM-D746 Test for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics
ASTM-DII90 Hot Poured Joint Sealer
ASTM-D1752 Specification for Preformed Cork Expansion Joint
Fillers
ASTM-D2240 Test for Rubber Property Durometer
ASTM-E96 Test for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
F FS-TT-S-
00230E Type II Cl. B Expansion Joint Sealant i
CRD-C588-76 Corps of Engineers Specification for Nan-Shrink Grout
ACI 211.1 Proportions for Normal Weight Concrete I
ACI 214 Compression Test Results
ACI 301 Structural Concrete
ACI 304 Measuring, Mixing, Transporting A Placing Concrete
ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306 Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 308 Curing Concrete
ACI 304 Consolidation of Concrete
1,03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING I
A. STORAGE OF CEMENT
Cement may be delivered in bulk or in bags which are marked 111
plainly with the brond and name of manufacturer. Immediately
upon receipt cement shall be stored in a dry, weathertight and
properly ventilated structure, which excludes moisture. All
storage facilities shall be subject to approval and shall be
such as to permit easy access for inspection and identifi-
catiin. Sufficient cement shall be in storage to complete
any lift of concrete started. In order that cement may not
become unduly aged after delivery, records of delivery dates
shall be maintained and the Contractor shall use any cement
which has been stored at the site for 60 days or more before
03300-2
!
1
using cement of lesser age. No cement will be used which is
lumped or caked or has been stored more than 90 days, or when
the cement temperature exceeds 1700F.
B. STORAGE OF AGGREGATES
The handling and storage of concrete aggregate shall be such
` as to prevent the admixture of foreign materials. If the
aggregates are stored on the ground, the sites for the stock-
piles shall be grubbed, cleared of all weeds and grass, and
f leveled. The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed !
or used without recleaning.
Different sizes of aggregates shall be stored in such a manner
^p as to prevent intermixing. Materials in all stockpiles shall
11 be handled in such a manner that segregation of materials
f within the pile will be avoided, and shall be built up in
layers not over three (3) feet in depth. Should segregation
occur, the aggregates shall be remixed to conform with the
grading requirements. Unless otherwise authorized by the 1
E Engineer, all fine aggregates shall be stockpiled at least 24
hours before mixing to reduce the free moisture content.
y'
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. CEMENT
Type I Portland Cement, conforming to the requirements of
ASTM-C150, shall be used for all concrete.
B. FLY ASH/POZZOLANS
I
Under normal conditions, fly ash/pozzolan shall not be used in
the concrete mix. When fly ash/pozzolan or Type 1P blended
hydraulic cement is to be used the material shall meet the
requirements of ASTM-C618/C595 and the supplier's certificate
as to the analysis and composition shall be furnished.
Before the use of fly ash/pozzolans is permitted, the Con-
tractor shall submit, for the Engineer's approval, a mix
design and the results of a testing program, both done by ui
independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Owner showing
that the concrete meets the design requirements specified.
C. ADMIXTURES
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, concrete of 3000
psi or stronger shall contain air-entraining admixtures and
when job conditions require water reducing and set controlling
admixtures may be used with written approval of the Engineer.
03300-3
I
i
f
1, Air Entraining Admixture: This shall comply with ASTM
Designation C-260. The total average air content shall
aggregate. 211.1; 4,5%
be 0% accordance for 2" maximum size recoendations of
t
i
2, Water Reducing Admixtures: This shall comply with ASTM
Designation C-494, and be accurately measured and added
to the mix in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
l D. WATER
f Water for concrete shall be clean and free from injurious
amounts of 01 11, acid alkali salt, organic matter, or other
deleterious substances. Water suitable for drinking or for
ordinary household use will be accepted for use without being
tested.
Water from doubtful sources shall not be used until tested
and approved in writing by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall not take water for use in concrete from shallow, muddy,
or marshy sources.
I When comparative tests are made with water of known satis-
in accordance with ASTM Method C-87 any
factory quality
indication of unsoundness, marked change in the time of set,
or reduction of more than five percent in mortar strength
shall be sufficient cause for rejection of water under test,
E. FINE AGGREGATE
Fine aggregate shall consist of natural washed and screened
sand complying with the requirements and tests of tpecif- ,
ications for Concrete Aggregates, ASTM Designation C33. The
gradation as included in ASTM-C33 air entrained concrete is
as follows:
i
SIEVE SIZE PERCENT RETAINED PERCENT PASSING
3/8„ 0 100
#4 0 - 5 95 - 100
#8 0 - 20 80 - 100
#16 15 - 50 50 - 85
#30 40 - 75 25 - 60
#50 70 - 90 10 - 30
#100 90 - 98 2 - 10
Fine aggregate shall have not more than 45 percent retained
between any two consecutive sieves and its fineness modulus,
as defined in ASTM-0125, shall be not less than 2.3 nor more
than 3.1.
f
03300-4
1
1
,
I
Iol"
I 1
F. COARSE AGGREGATE
Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone or gravel
conforming to the requirements and test of Specifications for
Concrete Aggregates, ASTM Designation C33, Gradation Size
Number 357, Size Number 67, and Size Number 467. Gradation
size Number 357 as included in ASTM Designation C33 is as
follows: i
NO. 357
SIEVE SIZE
SQUARE OPENING PERCENT RETAINED PERCENT PASSING
2-1/211 0 100
0 - 5 95 - 100
30 - 65 35 - 70
1/2" 70 - 90 10 - 30
No. 4 95 - 100 0 - 5
i
Gradation Size Number 67 as included in ASTM C33 is as +
follows:
NO. 67
SIEVE SIZE
SQUARE OPENING PERCENT RETAINED PERCENT PASSING
1 II 0 100
3/4" 0 - 10 90 - 100
3/8" 45 - 80 20 - 55
Nor 4 90 - 100 0 - 10
No, 8 95 - 100 0 - 5
Gradation Size No. 467 as included in ASTM C33 is as follows: j
NO. 467
SIEVE SIZE
SQUARE OPENING PERCENT RETAINED PERCENT PASSING
2 0 100
0 - 5 95 - 100
3/4" 30 - 65 35 - 70
3/8" 70 - 90 10 - 30
No, 4 95 - 100 0 - 5
03300-5
a
r
i
{
G. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
j 1. Joint Materials;
a. Premolded expansion joint material shall conform to
ASTM D-1752 for resilient, non-bituminous, Type
II, in the thickness specified.
b. Joint sealer shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM D1190.
I
C. Expansion joint sealant shall be a one component
gun grade polysulfide base elastomeric sealing
compound. This material shall conform to the
requirements ^f FS-TT-S-00230E Type II Class B as
manufactured t,y A. C. Horn Co., or Thiokol Chemical
Co., or approved equal. Backing material for
" sealant shall be 1-inch polyethylene rod prepared
as sho~%m on plans. Where surface is to receive a
swept-in grout topping, a 3-inch wide 1 m11
polyethylene strip shall be placed above the joint
sealant, which strip shall be held in place with "
1-inch wide polyethylene tape spaced at 12-inch
centers (maximum).
2. Waterstops shall be Synkoflex, a preformed plastic adhesive
wasterstop manufactured by Synko-Flex products Co., or
approved equal.
3. Sheet materials for curing concrete when required shall
conform to ASTM C171.
a. Waterproof paper
b. Polyethylene film
i
y c. White burlap - polyethylene film
4. Membrane caring compound when allowed shall conform to
ASTM C309.
5. Epoxy Resins for coating, grouting, seal coating,
wearing surfaces etc. The epoxy selected shall carry
the manufacturer's recommendation for the planned
arpl ication. For applications involving moist or uet
surfaces, the epoxy selected shall be compatible with
the moisture. The manufacturer's recommendation shall
be followed in every detail.
i
1
03300-6
I I.~
6. Epoxy Resins for bonding fresh concrete to hardened
concrete shall be Sikadur NI-MOD (Sikastix 370) or an
approved equivalent. The epoxy shall carry the manu-
facturer s recommendation for the planned application
and the recommendation shall be followed in every
detail.
7. Shrinkage Compensating Grout:
i
a. General: This section covers grouting of pump,
motor, and equipment baseplates or bedplates,
column baseplates, other miscellaneous baseplates,
piping block outs and other uses of grout as
r indicated on the drawings. Epoxy grouts shall be
used in the presence of chemicals that will abrade ,
cementitious grouts. Unless otherwise specified, 1
all grouting shall be done with non-shrinking
grout.
b. Mats^i al s:
(1) for all non-shrinking grout, the manufacturer
shall furnish from an approved independent
laboratory, recent test results verifying that
the grout shows:
No shrinkage from the time of placement, or
expansion after set, under ASTM-CB27 and
CRD-C588-76 (Corps of Engineers).
A twenty-four (24) hour compressive strength
in a trowelable mix of not less than three
thousand pounds per square inch (3,000 psi)
under ASTM-C109.
An initial set time of not less than forty-five
(45) minutes under ASTM-091.
(2) All grout shall be non-organic, non-metallic,
non-staining and resist attack by oil and
water.
(3) Epoxy grouts shall be furnished in two
components from the factory and mixed on the
Sob site.
(4) The Contractor shall obtain field technical
assistance from the grout manufacturer, as
required, to insure proper installation of the
grout in compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and procedures.
i 03300-1
j'
'I
f
I ,
1
f
1
j c. Installation:
} i
(1) For ct-mentitious grouts, the foundation should
be saturated for twenty-four (24) hours before
installation and cleared of excess water im-
mediately before installation. All baseplates
or bedplates should be free of oil, grease,
laitance and other foreign substances.
(2) For epoxy grouts, the foundation and baseplate
or bedplate should be clean, dry, and sound AA
prior to installation.
(3) Mixing: All mixing shall take place according
to manufacturer's recommended procedures.
(4) Placement: Grout shall be placed in strict
accordance with the directions of the manu-
facturer so that all spaces and cavities below
the top of the baseplates and bedplates are
completely filled without voids. Forms shall
be provided where structural components of the
baseplates or bedplates will not confine the
grout. Where necessary, and acceptable under
manufacturer's procedures, a round head Pencil
vibrator, three quarters of an inch (3/4'}
maximum diameter, is allowable.
(5) Edge Finishing: In all locations where the
edge of the grout will be exposed to view, the
nonshrink grout, after it has reached its
initial set, shall be finished smooth, Except
where indicated to be finished on a slope, the
edges of the grout shall be cut off flush at
the baseplate, bedplate, member, or piece of r
equipment,
(6) Curing: For cementitious grouts, wet curing
should take place for at least three (3) days,
by wet rags, wet burlap or polyethylene
sheets. All cloths shall be kept constantly
wet for the curing cycle.
For epoxy grouts, dry curing is acceptable,
B, Vapor Barrier, where required. shall be minimum 6 mil
i thickness natural polyethylene film with a permeability
I of not more than 0.11 perms in accordance with ASTM-E96.
Joints or splices where required shall be made with
minimum 2" wide tape equivalent to the material being
joined or spliced,
03300-8
top,
r
i
,ranular fill WON the vapor barrier shall be smoothed
and any protrusions that might damage or rupture the
polyethylene film shall be eliminated, Completely cover
porous fill with film. Lap film not less than 6" at all i
joints, with the top placed in the direction of spread-
ing of the concrete, Use pressure sensitive tape at all
t _ laps of vapor barrier. Lap reinforcement directly over
film prior to placing concrete, taking precautions to
prevent film punctures. Carefully cut film around pipes
and wiring outlets, and then apply pressure sensitive
tape around these protrusions to insure maximum barrier
effectiveness.
2.02 CONCRETE PROPORTIONS
r A. GENERAL. y
ACI 211.1 shall be the basis for selecting the proportions
for concrete made with aggregates of normal and high density
and of workability suitable for usual cast-in-place struc-
tures.
B. PROCEDURE IN DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES
1, General; The Contractor shall be responsible for the
design of the concrete consistent with the minimum
requirements of strength and proportions stated herein.
The proportions of materials entering into the mix,
subject to limitations already stated, to produce
concrete of satisfactory quality, shall be determined by
j laboratory tests prior to beginning of concrete placing,
Design shall be in accordance with ACI Standard 211.1
"Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions of
Concrete," subject to maximum water cement ratio,
minimum cement content and minimum strengths set forth
herein.
2. Trial Mixes; An independent testing laboratory retained
by the Contractor and approved by the Owner shall deter-
mine the materials and proportions for trial concrete
mixes to meet the requirements of this specification.
The laboratory trial concrete mix design shall be
submitted for the Engineer's approval before the 7-day
strength tests are made.
Laboratory samples shall be made in accordance with the
trial mix designs for laboratory testing purposes. The
fresh concrete shall be tested for Slump (ASTM-C143) and
Air Content (ASTM-C173/C231), Strength test specimens
shall be made, cured and tested for 7 and 28 day
strength in accordance with ASTM-C192, ASTM-C39,
ASTM-0293.
03300-9
i
Laboratory tests on trial mixes shall show a 28-day
strength 10 percent higher than the stated minimum 28day
strength. From these preliminary tests, the ratios
between 7-day and 28-day strengths shall be established
to determine at 7 days the strengths necessary to
satisfy the required 28-day strengths. The 7-day trial
mix strength test results shall be submitted at least 14
days in advance of the 28-day strength tests. The final
results of the laboratory tests of the trial mixes shall
be submitted to the Engineer at least 10 days prior to
the beginning of concrete placement.
h 3. Changes in Mixes: If, during the progress of the work,
it is found impossible to secure concrete of required
workability and strength with the materials being
furnished by the Contractor, the Engineer may order
changes in proportions or materials or both, necessary
to secure the desired properties, subject to limitations
alraady stated. The Contractor may not make changes in
! materials, either gradation, source, or brand, or
proportions of mixtures after their having once been
approved except by specific written approval of the
! Engineer.
f C. WORKABILITY q
In general the workability of any mix shall be that required {
for the specific placing conditions and method of placement.
The concrete shall be of such workability that it can be
worked readily into all corners and around reinforcing
without segregation of materials or having free water collect
on the surface. Compliance with specified slump limitations
shall not necessarily designate a satisfactory mix. The
Engineer may require changes in proportions at any time as
necessary to obtain a mix having satisfactory properties.
The slump tests will be made by the Engineer (or a designated
representative of the Owner's laboratory) in accordance with
ASTM Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete,
Designation C-143.
In no case shall the amount of coarse material be such as to
produce harshness in placing or honeycombing in the structure
when forms are removed.
i
03300-I0
D. CONCRETE CLASSIFICATIONS
f'c Cement Max.Sixe Max.Water Max.
28 day Bags Agg. Gals/Bag Slump
Class (psi) C.Y. (inches) (net) (inches) Use
A 3000 5.5 1.5 6.25 4-6 General. All
reinf. conc. structures
this project unless
otherwise specified
E 1500 3.0 1.5 8.25 4 Cradling, Blocking, E
Lean Concrete
The maximum amount of coarse aggregate (dry loose volume) per cubic
foot of finished concrete shall not exceed 0.82 cubic feet.
The maximum amount of water as set forth in the table above
is based on the assumption that the aggregates are in a
saturated, surface dry condition.
1
The maximum water content will be the amount added at the
mixer, plus the free water in the aggregate, and minus the I
absorption of the aggregate based on a thirty-minute absorp-
tion period. No allowance will be made for evaporation of
water after batching. If additional water is required to
obtain the desired slum , a com e~ nsa ng amoun o cement
shall also-be added.`M max mum water--cement ra 1o sha~'I
no be excee ed1Jo additional compensation will be made
To additional cement which may be used under this condition.
The concrete mix will be designed with the intention of
producing concrete which will have compressive or flexural
# strength equal to or greater than the following when using 1
current ASTM Qe.ignation C-39 and C-293:
Minimum Minimum
Class of Compressive Strength Flexural Strength
Concrete (Pounds per Square Inch) (Pounds er j uaq re l__y
ay as
A. 2,000 3,000 400 500
250
E. 1,000 19500 150
E. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Laboratory Service: The control of design, propor-
tioning, mixing, and testing of all materials, ready
mix, transit mix or central plant concrete shall be
under the supervision of the Owner's Testing Laboratory.
A representative of the Laboratory will work in coope-
' 03300-11
ration with the Contractor and the Engineer and will
furnish to the Engineer and Contractor a summary of all
tests which are performed. No concrete shall be placed
without a representative of the Laboratory being present
either at the plant or at the project site.
a. Small Placements: For concrete placements of ten
cubic yards or less, the Engineer may waive these
requirements; however, in such event, evidence
shall be furnished showing a design mix to meet the
requirements of the specifications,
a
b. Cost of Laboratory Service; Unless otherwise
specified, all cost for laboratory service except
those tests in connection with the mix design and
trial batches at the beginning of the project shall
be borne by the Owner. Cost of mix design and
tests as required for initial batch designs shall
be paid for by the Contractor.
F. TESTS OF CONCRETE
1. General: Frequent tests will be required by the
Engineer throughout the work to determine the quality of
concrete. Unless otherwise specified these tests shall
be made by an independent testing laboratory to be
selected and paid for by the Owner. All samples shall
be taken in accordance with ASTM C172.
2, Slump Test: The slump test as described in ASTM C143
will be used to indicate workability and consistency of
the concrete mix from batch to batch. Generally, a
slump test will be made at the start of operations each
day, at regular intervals throughout a working day, and
at any time when the appearance of the concrete suggests
a change in uniformity, k
3, Air Content Test: Tests for air content of the concrete r
shall be made in accordance with ASTM C231, at the point
of delivery of concrete gust prior to placing in forms.
The test shall be made often enough to insure a proper
air content uniform from batch to batch,
4, Compression Test: Compression test specimens shall be
6" x 12" concrete cylinders made and cured according to
the latest designation of ASTM C31. The number of
specimens and frequency of sampling shall be determined
by the Engineer. No fewer than two specimens shall be
made for each test to be made at each age (7 and 28
days), and samples shall be taken at a minimum of every
160 cubic yards of concrete of each class placed,
Further, at least one set of test specimens per day
03300-12
I
shall be made of each class of concrete used that day.
All specimens shall be cured under laboratory conditions
specified in ASTM C31.
Additional concrete cylinders may be required to be
cured on the job under the actual job curing conditions-,
this shall be the Contractor's responsibility. These
samples could be required when:
! a. In the opinion of the Engineer, there is a possi-
bility of the air temperature surrounding the
concrete falling below 40 degrees F., or rising
above 90 degrees F.
b. In the opinion of the Engineer, the curing pro-
cedure may need improving and/or lengthening.
C. Necessary to determine when structure may be put in
service.
i
Compression strength tests shall be made on the labora-
tory cured and Job cured concrete cylinders at 7 and 28
days, in accordance with ASTM C39, latest designation.
The value of each test result shall be the average
compressive strength of two samples taken at the same
time from the same batch of concrete. The tests made it
j 7 days shall show strengths of not less than two-thirds
(2/3) of the design strength. For the 28 day cylinders,
the strength level will be considered satisfactory if
the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength '
test results exceeds the required design compressive
1 strength, f'c, and no individual strength test result
falls below the required f'c, by more than 500 psi.
If the test record of the standard-cured specimens fails
to satisfy the strength requirements, the Engineer shall
have the right to order a change in the mix proportions.
If the ,fob-cured cylinders fail the strength criteria,
! the Engineer shall have the right to require changes in
temperature, moisture conditions, and time for the
curing process to obtain the required strength. If a i
strength deficiency exists as shown by either test
record, the questionable portion of the structure shall
~
be cored, tested and evaluated according to AC[ 301. ~
The cost for testing of the hardened concrete structure
and possible subsequent replacing of a part of it found ;
1 to be inadequate shall be at the Contractor's expense.
Unless the Owner's laboratory is on the site, the
Contractor shall provide such housing as may be required
for curing and storage of test specimens and testing
equipment. The Contractor, if he desires, may at his
03300-13
i
expense, have tests made of cylinders as a check on the
tests made for the Owner,
5 Failure to Meet Requirements: Should the 7-day
strengths shown by the test specimens fall below the
required values, the Engineer shall have the authority
to require additional curing on those portions of the
structures represented by the test specimens. The
additional curing required by the Engineer shall be done
at the Contractor's expense, and test cores shall be
} obtained and tested in accordance with ASTM Method of
Obtaining and Testing Specimens from Hardened Cores and
Beams of Concrete, Designation C42. In the event that
such additional curing does not give the strength
required, the Engineer shall have the right to require
strengthening or replacement, at the Contractor's
expense, of those portions of the structure which failed
to develop the required strength.
[ Upon receipt of written request by the Contractor,
substandard concrete work may be re-examined in place by
non-destructive testing methods or core samples in
accordance with ACI 301. The Contractor shall retain
the services of an independent testing laboratory
approved by the Engineer and shall bear all expenses
without compensation from the Owner, Laboratory results
shall be evaluated by the Engineer and the Engineer
shall make the final decision on acceptability of the
concrete in question.
The Owner may withhold payment for any section of
concrete that does not meet the requirements of these
specifications for placement, lines, finishing, general
workmanship or strength. Withheld payment shall be
based on the unit prices bid for additional concrete and
reinforcing steel. Payment shall be withheld until the
unacceptable concrete has been refinished, removed and
replaced or otherwise brought into conformance with the
specifications.
G. MIXING CONDITIONS
1. General: The concrete shall be mixed in quantities
required for immediate use, and any concrete which is
not in place within the time limits specified in
paragraph GA shall not be used. Retempering of
concrete will not be permitted,
2, Concrete Temperature: No concrete shall be placed when
{ the temperature of the concrete to be placed is greater
than 90 degrees F. or less than 50 degrees F. The
E temperature of the concrete to be placed will be taken
03300-14
i
i
I
l ~
by the Engineer using a thermometer immediately prior to
placement with the point of measurement being in the
I chute or bucket.
1 3. Cold Weather; No concrete shall be mixed without the
approval of the Engineer when the air temperature is at
authorized away tfrom
falling. i If the shade
or below artificial O heat) degrees and F. (taken
he
art
Engineer, concrete may be mixed when Oe air temperature
is at 35 degrees F. and rising. All cold weather
3 concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI-306.
When permission is given for mixing when the air
temperature is below 40 degrees F., all water used for
mixing shall be heated to a temperature sufficient to
raise the temperature of concrete to 70 degrees F., but
the temperature of the mixing water shall not exceed 165
degrees F. at the time of entering the mixer. If
heating the mixing water only will not raise: the placing temperature of the concrete to 70 degrees then the
~
aggregate must also be heated, either by s`,eam or dry
heat, to a temperature sufficient to raise the placing
temperature of the concrete to the required temperature.
In no case shall the aggregate temperature as it enters
the mixer exceed 150 degrees F. The heating apparatus
shall be such as to heat the mass of the aggregate
i uniformly and preclude the occtirrence of hot spots which
I will burn the material. Temperatures of transported
concrete shall not be less than 60 degrees F. at the
I time of placing in the forms.* Salts, chemicals or
other foreign materials shall not be mixed with the
concrete for purpose of preventing freezing.
*Adequate means shall be provided to maintain the
l concrete and the surrounding air at a minimum tem-
it perature of 50 degrees F. for a minimum of 3 days.
4. Hot Weather: Hot weather is defined as any combination
of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind
velocity that in the Judgment of the Engineer would
impair the quality of the concrete. All hot weather
concreting shall be in accordance with ACI-305.
Concrete shall be placed in the forms without the
addition of any more water than required by the design
(slump). No excess water shall be added on the
concrete surface for finishing. Control of initial set
of the concrete and extending the time for finishing
operations may be accomplished with the use of an
approved water-reducing and set-retarding admixture as
specified above.
03300-15
V 7T
i
Maximum time intervals between the ad
water and/or cement to the batch, andtheoPlacingxofg
concrete in the forms shall not exceed the following; /
Air or Concrete Temperature
(whichever higher) Addition xofuWateretorPlacement
Non-Agitated Concrete
Up to 80° F. 30 Minutes
Over 80° F.
15 Minutes
Agitated Concrete
Up to 75° F. 90 Minutes
75° to 89° F. Over 90° F, (max, permissible 60 Minutes
concrete temperature) 45 Minutes
The use of an approved set-retarding admixture will
permit the extension of the above time maximums by 30
minutes, for_ agitated concrete one.
Under extreme hot temperature, wind, or humidity
conditions, the Engineer may require the use of the
set-retarding agent, or may suspend concreting ope-
rations if quality of the concrete being placed is not
acceptable.
2.03 BATCNING, MEASURING AND MIXING
A. GENERAL I
If operated on the Job site, the batching plant shall be
located in an area approved by the Engineer.
Separate bins or compartments shall be provided for each size
or classification of aggregate and for bulk Portland cement
when used. The compartments shall be of ample size and so
constructed that there is no mixing or mingling of the
materials being batched during operations, The batching
plant shall be equipped so that the flow of each material
into the batcher is stopped automatically when the designated
weight has been reached, Aggregate may be weighed in sepa-
rate weigh batchers with individual scales, or cumulatively
in one weigh batcher on ons scale. Bulk Portland cement
shall be weighed on a separate scale in a separate weigh
batcher, Water may be measured by weight or by volume, if
measured by weight, it shall not be weighed cumulatively with
another ingredient, Batrhing controls shall be so inter-
locked that the charging mechanism cannot be opened until the
03300-16
r
t
scales have returned to zero. These requirements can be
satisfied by a semiautomatic batching system as defined in
the Concrete Plant an ar s o the toncre~e Plant Manu-
facturer's Bureau, Sixth Revision, (Dec. 1, 1977) with
interlocking as described above, or by an automatic batching
system as defined in the Concrete Plant Standards--The p-ian't
shall -be arranged so as to facilitate the inspection of all
operations at all times. Suitable facilities shall be
provided for obtaining representative samples of aggregate
from each of the bins or compartments for test purposes.
Delivery of materials from the batching equipment shall be
within the following limits of accuracy:
` Material Percent
Cement I
Water I
Aggregate 2
r Admixtures 3 I
F When aggregates are weighed cumulatively, the limit for
aggregate applies to the total weight in the batcher after
each aggregate size has been batched.
B. WATER BATCHER AND ADMIXTURE DISPENSER 4
2 Equipment for batching water and the air-entraining admixture
a shall be provided at the batching plant or included with the
paving mixers or truck mixers as required for the type of
plant used,
C. WATER BATCHERS
A suitable water measuring device shall be provided which
will be capable of measuring the mixing water within the
► specified requirements for each batch. The mechanism for
delivering water to the mixers shall be such that leakage
will not occur when the valves are closed. The filling and
discharge valves for the water batcher shall be so inter-
locked that the discharge valve cannot be opened before the
filling valve is fully closed. '
I
D. ADMIXTURE DISPENSER
A suitable device for measuring and dispensing the air-en-
training admixture shall be provided. The device shall be
capable of ready adjustment to permit varying the quantity of
admixture to be batched. The dispenser for air-entraining
admixtures shall be interlocked with the batching and dis-
charging operations of the water so that the batching and
discharging of the admixture will be automatic.
03300-17
t
1
i
E, MOISTURE CONTROL
The plant shall be capable of ready adjustment to compensate
for the varying moisture contents of the aggregate, and to
change the weights of the materials being batched. An
electric moisture meter shall be provided for measurement of
moisture in the fine aggregate. The sensing element shall be
arranged so that the measurement is made near the batcher
( charging gate of the sand bin or in the sand batcher.
F. SCALES
Adequate facilities shall be provided for the accurate ,
measurement and control of each of the materials entering
each batch of concrete. The accuracy of the weighing equip-
ment shall conform to the applicable requirements of National
Bureau of Standards Handbook 44 for such equipment, The
Contractor shall provide standard test weights and any other
auxiliary equipment required for checking the operating
performance of each scale or other measuring device. Peri-
odic tests shall be made in the presence of the Engineer in
such a manner and at such intervals as may be directed. Upon
completion of each check test and before further use of the
indicating recording or control devices, the Contractor shall
make: such adjustments, repairs or replacements as may be
required to secure satisfactory performance. Each weighing
unit shall include a visible springless dial which shall
indicate the scale load at all stages of the weighing opera-
tion, or shall include a beam scale with a beam balance
indicator which will show the scale in balance at zero load
and at any beam setting. The indicator shall have an over
and under travel equal to at least 5 percent of the capacity t
of the beam, The weighing equipment shall be arranged so
that the plant operator can conveniently observe all dials or
indicators. i
i
G. RECORDERS
An accurate recorder or recorders shall produce a graphical
or digital record of the scale reading after each of the
i aggregates and cement has been batched prior to delivery to
the mixer and after the batchers have been discharged (return
to zero reference). The weight or volume of water shall also
be recorded if batched at a central batching plant. Recor-
ders shall conform to the following detailed requirements.
Each recorder shall be housed in a cabinet which shall be
capable of being locked.
The charts or tapes shall clearly indicate the difterent
types of mixes used by stamped letters, numerals, colored ink
or by other suitable means. The charts or tapes shall be so
03300-1.8
77
i
i
r
marked that variations in batch weights of each type of mix
can be readily observed.
The charts or tapes shall show time of day (stamped or
preprinted) at intervals of not more than 15 minutes.
The recorded charts or tapes shall become the property of the
Owner.
The recorders shall be placed in a position convenient for
` observation by the plant operator and inspector.
This requirement may be deleted by the Engineer if satis-
factory evidence is presented to demonstrate consistent
performance of the plant.
H. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT
Mixers may be stationary mixers, truck mixers, or paving 4
mixers of approved design. Mixers shall be capable of
combining the materials Into a uniform mixture and of dis-
charging this mixture without segregation. Stationary and
paving mixers shall be provided with an acceptable device to
loCK the discharge mechanism until the required mixing time
j has elapsed. Truck mixers shall be equipped with accurate i
revolution counters. The mixers or mixing plant shall
include a device for automatically counting the total number
i of batches of concrete mixed. The miners shall be operated
` at the drum or mixing blade speed designated by the manu-
facturer on the name plate.
The mixing time for stationary mixers shall be based upon the
ability of the mixer to produce uniform concrete throughout I
i
the batch and from batch to batch. For guidance purposes,
j the Manufacturer's recommendations or 1 min. for l cu. yd.
plus 1/4 min. for each additional cu. yd, may be used. Final
mixing time shall be based on mixer performance. Mixers
shall not be charged in excess of the capacity recommended by
the manufacturer on the specification plate attached to the
machine.
When a stationary mixer is used for partial mixing of the
concrete (shrink mixed) the mixing time in the stationary
mixer may be reduced to the minimum necessary to intermingle
the ingredients (about 30 seconds).
When a truck mixer is used either for complete mixing
(transitmixed) or to finish the partial mixing done in a
stationary mixer, in the absence of uniformity test data,
each batch of concrete shall be mixed not less than 70 nor
more than 100 revolutions of the drum at the rate of rotation
designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as mixing
03300.19
1
i
~i
speed, If the batch is at least 1/2 cubic yard less than the
rated capacity, in the absence of uniformity test data, tho
number of revolutions at mixing speed may be reduced to not
less than 50. Any additional mixing shall be done at the
speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as
agitating speed. When necessary for proper control of the
concrete, mixing of transit mixed concrete will not be
permitted until the truck mixer is at the site of the con-
crete placement.
Paving mixers may be either single compartment drum or
multiple compartment drum type. A sled or box of suitable
size shall be attached to the mixer under the bucket so as to
catch any spillage of concrete that may occur when the mixer
is discharging concrete into the bucket. Multiple compart-
ment drum paving mixers shall be properly synchronized, and
the mixing time shall be determined by including the time
required to transfer the concrete between compartments of the
drum. Vehicles used in transporting materials from the
batching plant to the paving mixers shall have bodies )r
compartments of adequate capacity to carry the materials and
to deliver each batch, separated and intact, to the mixer.
Except as otherwise approved, loose cement shall be trans-
ported from the batching plant to the mixers in separate
boxes or compartments which shall be equipped with windproof
and rain-proof covers.
1. SAMPLING
Suitable facilities sh0l be provided for readily obtaining
representative samples of aggregate from each of the weigh i
batchers for test purposes. Suitable facilities shall be I
provided for obtaining representative samples of concrete for
uniformity tests. All necessary platforms, tools, and
equipment for obtaining samples shall be furnished by the
Contractor.
3,00 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
;j
A. APPROVAL BY ENGINEER
I
Before starting work, the Contractor shall inform the Engi-
noer fully as to the type of forms, falsework, and methods of
construction he proposes to use, and as to the amount and
character of equipment he proposes to use, the adequacy of
which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer, The
Contractor shall submit, for the Engineer's approval, a
schedule showing the sequence of concrete placements. Ap-
proval of forms, falsework, and methods of construction by
03300-20
the Engineer Fhall not be considered as relieving the Con-
tractor of the responsibility for the safety or correctness or from ing houtmethods
the o work n in adequac of his accordance equipment,
the Contract,carry-
B. TIME SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
Unless otherwise provided, the following requirements shall
govern for the time sequence in which construction operations
shall be carried on. Forms for walls or columns shall not be
erected on concrete footings until the concrete in the
footing has cured at least two curing days. Concrete may be
placed in a wall or column as soon as the forms and rein-
forcing steel placements are approved. Steel beams or forms
and falsework for superstructures shall not be erected on
concrete substructures until the concrete in the substructure
has cured at least four curing days. Approved falsework
required for superstructures shall not be erected until the
substructure has cured 4 curing days and shall :iot be removed
uritiI the superstructure has cured 7 days. The use of com-
pleted portions of a structure as the site for mixing opera-
tions or for storage of materials will not be permitted
without the Engineer's approval.
j C. EXPANSION JOINTS AND DEVICES j
1. General Requirements: Expansion Joints and devices to
provide for expansion and contraction shall be con-
structed where and as indicated on the Plans. All
Joints constructed open, which are to be left open or
filled with poured Joint material, shall be constructed
using forms adaptable to loosening or early removal.
In order to avoid ,lamming such forms by the expansion
i action of the concrete and the consequent likelihood of j
injury to the adjacent concrete, these forms shall be
removed or loosened as soon as practicable after the
concrete has attained its initial set. A provision for
loosening the forms to permit free expansion of the
concrete without the necessity for full removal is
preferred,
2. Workmanship: Armored Joints shall be carefully con-
structed in order to avoid defective anchorage of the
steel and to avoid porous or honeycombed concrete
adjacent to same. Pr•emolded materials, wherever used,
i shall be anchored to the concrete on one side of the
joint by means of an approved adhesive, Such anchorage
r s
material to fall hall be sufficient to preclude the tendency of the
u o
shall be exercised In thehconstructionrofuallofointshto
insure that the concrete sections are completely
i~ 03300-2k
r
i
1
separated by an open ,joint, or by the Joint materials,
and to insure that the joints will be true to the
outline indicated. Immediately after the removal of
forms, and again where necessary after surface finish-
ing, all projecting concrete shall be removed along the
exposed edges of premolded materials in order to secure
full effectiveness of the expansion ,joint. Where
I roofing felt or premolded materials are specified for
horizontal ,joints, the material shall, if practicable,
extend two inches beyond the form for the top member.
The projecting portion shall be subsequently trimmed to
the face of the member after the forms are removed.
3. Embedded Items: Before concrete placement begins all
embedded items, i.e., water stops, anchor bolts,
mechanical and electrical inserts shall be checked to
4 determine that they are firmly and securely fastened at
the locations shown on the plans. They must be free of
oil, rust and anything else that would prevent proper
bonding to the concrete. Molds, when required shall be i
made by use of some easily removed material.
4. Aluminum in Contact with or Embedded in Concrete: Where
aluminum anchors, aluminum shapes, or aluminum electrical
conduits are embedded in concrete, all contact surfaces ti
1 shall be painted with zinc chromate primer in accordance i
with United States Joint Army-Navy Specification
JANP-735. The paint shall be allowed to thoroughly dry
before the aluminum is placed in contact with the con-
crete,
I Aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with concrete,
i! wood, or masonry construction, except where the aluminum
j is to be embedded in concrete, shall be given a heavy
r coat of an alkali-resistant bituminous paint before
installation, The bituminous paint used shall meet the R
r requirements of United States Military Specification !
MIL-P-6883. The paint shall be applied as it is received
from the manufacturer without the addition of any
thinner.
All steel or other ferrous metal to be mounted on or
placed in contact with dry/cured concrete such as valve
operator floor stands, electrical switchgear, etc., shall
be painted on the mounting surface in accordance with
PAINTING Specification
for
exterior metal
surfaces in
non-critical areas.
O. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
The joint formed by placing plastic concrete in direct
contact with concrete that has attained i
i is initial set shall
03300-22
I
i
l
i
be deemed a construction joint. When concrete in a structure (i
or a portion of a structure is specified to be monolithic,
the term monolithic shall be interpreted to mean that the
manner and sequence of concrete placing shall be such that
construction joints will not occur, Construction joints
shall be of the type and spacing shown on the plans, Addi-
tional horizontal and vertical construction joints will be
considered by the Engineer upon request, but shall not be
used without prior written approval of the Engineer. The
locations and elevations of additional construction joints
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Construc-
tion joints shall be neatly chamfered three-eighths of an
inch (3/8") as directed by the Engineer.
a Unless otherwise provided, construction joints shall be
square and normal to the forms. Bulkheads shall be provided
in the forms for all joints except horizontal joints,
Horizontal construction joints shall be prepared for re-
ceiving the succeeding lift by cleaning by air-water cutting.
The air-water cutting of a construction joint shall be done #
at the proper time. The surface shall be exposed sound,
' clean aggregate. The air pressure supply to the jet shall be
approximately one hundred (1001 pounds per square inch, and
the water pressure shall be just sufficient to bring the
water into effective influence of the air pressure. After
cutting, the surface shall be washed until there is no trace
of cloudiness of the wash water.
In areas where air-water cutting cannot be satisfactorily
accomplished, or in areas where it is considered undesirable
by the Engineer to disturb the surface of the concrete before
it has hardened, the surface shall be prepared for receiving J
the next lift by wet sand blasting to remove all laitance and 1
unsound concrete immediately prior to placing of the next
lift. The surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly washed
after sand blasting to remove all loose material.
Immediately prior to the placing of additional concrete, all
forms shall be drawn tight against the concrete in place, and
the surfaces of the concrete in place shall be flushed with a
coating of grout mixed in the proportions of one part of
cement to two parts of sand.
If shown on the plans, construction joints shall be provided
with concrete keyways, reinforcing steel dowels, and water-
stops. The method of forming keys in keyed joints shall be
such as to permit the easy removal of forms without chipping,
breaking, or damaging the concrete in any manner.
03300-23
1
i
E. PREPARATION OF EXISTING HARDENED CONCRETE
Where new concrete or any grouting compound except epoxy grout
s is to be placed in contact with existing hardened concrete,
the existing surface shall be textured by chipping or other
means so that an irregular surface which has a height variance
of not less than 1/4-inch is created. The existing concrete
shall then be treated in accordance with paragraph D. above.
ll 3.02 PLACING CONCRETE
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Preliminary Consideration: The Contractor shall notify
the Engineer upon completion of various portions of the
work required for placing concrete so that inspection may
be made as early as is practicable. The Contractor shall
also keep the Engineer informed regarding his anticipated
concrete placing schedule. When all items have been
found to be in order by the Engineer including lines and
grades, forms, reinforcing, inserts, piping, electrical,
plumbing and the Contractor's concreting materials and
equipment, the Engineer will then authorize the Con-
tractor to proceed. Unless authorized by the Engineer,
no concrete shall be placed in any unit prior to the
completion of all form-work and the placement of all
reinforcement in that unit. No concrete shall be placed
1 before the completion of all adjacent operations which
might prove detrimental to the concrete. Whenever it is 1
necessary to continue the mixing, placing, and finishing
of concrete after the daylight hours, the site of the
work shall be brilliantly lighted so that all operations
are plainly visible. In general, however, concrete
placing shall be so regulated as to permit finishing
operations to be completed in the daylight hours. The
Engineer reserves the right to order postponement of the
placing operations when, in his opinion, impending
weather conditions may result in rainfall or tow
temperatures which will impair the quality of the
finished work. In case rainfall should occur after
placing operations are started, the Contractor shall
provide ample covering to protect the work.
2. Cleaning Forms: At the time of placing concrete, the
forms shall be clean and entirely free om all chips,
dirt, sawdust, and other extraneous matter. Forms for
slab, beam and girder construction shall not have tie
wire cuttings, nails, matches or any other matter
whatsoever which would mar the appearance of the finished
construction. All forms shall be cleaned to the satis-
faction of the Engineer, and kept free of foreign matter
of all kinds during concrete placing.
{
03300-24
a
3, Embedded Items: Before placing concrete, care shall be
taken to determine that all embedded i';ems are firmly and
J securely fastened in place. All embedded items shall be
I thoroughly clean and free of oil and other foreign
y mate,- Ial. Anchor bolts shall be set to exact locations
by the use of suitable anchor bolt templates, or as
otherwise showy on the plans.
B. HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING
Chutes, troughs, or pipes used as aids in placing concrete
shall be arranged and used so that the ingredients of the
concrete will not be segregated. They shall be steel or
steel lined. When steep slopes are necessary, the chutes
shall be equipped with baffles or made in short lengths that
reverse the direction of movement. Open troughs and chutes
shall extend, if necessary, down inside the forms or through
holes left in the forms, and the ends of such chutes shall
terminate in vertical downspouts. All chutes, troughs, and
pipes shall be kept clean and free from coatings of hardened
concrete by a thorough flushing with water before and after
placement. Water used for flushing shall be discharged
clear of the concrete in place. Non-agitating trucks shall
be used only when authorized by the Engineer with due con-
sideration of the length of haul, roughness of roads, and
design of trucks proposed. Pumping of concrete will be
permitted, subject to approval of the pumping equipment by
the Engineer. The placing of concrete for floor slabs
preferably shall be done by a mixing plant located off the
structure. Carting or wheeling concrete batches on completed
concrete floor slab will not be permitted until the slab has
aged at least four curing days. Unless pneumatic tired carts
are used, the carts shall be wheeled on timber planking so
that the loads and impact will be distributed over the slab.
Curing operations shall not be interrupted for the purpose of
wheeling concrete over finished slabs.
C. DEPOSITING
i
The method and manner of placing shall be such as to avoid
the possibility of segregation or separation of the aggregate
or the displacement of the reinforcement. In thin walls,
drop chutes of rubber or metal shall be used, The spattering
of forms or reinforcement bars shall be prevented if the
concrete so spattered will dry or harden before being in- E
corporated in the mass, Each part of the forms shall be
filled by depositing concrete directly as near its final
r position as possible. The coarse aggregate shall be worked {
I back from the face and the concrete forced under and around
the reinforcement bars without displacing them. Depositing
large quantities at one point in the forms and running or
y
03300-25
working it along the forms will not be allowed. After the
concrete has taken initial set, the forms shall not be jarred
or any strain placed on projecting reinforcement, Where the
Contractor's operations involve the placing of concrete from
above, that is, directly into an excavated area or through
the completed forms, particularly in the case of walls,
piers, columns, and similar structures, all concrete so
placed shall be deposited through vertical drop chutes of
rubber or metal of satisfactory size. Drop chutes shall be
made in sections or provider in several lengths so that the
outlet may be adjusted to proper heights during placing
operations. Concrete shall not be dropped free more than
five (5) feet. Concrete shall be placed in continuous
horizontal layers with a depth of from 1 to 3 feet, depending
upon the wall thickness. Each layer shall be soft when a new
I layer is placed upon it, and unless otherwise specified
herein or by the Engineer, not more than one hour shall
elapse between the placing of successive layers of concrete
in any portion of the structures included in a continuous
placement. The Contractor should avoid additional construc-
t1on joints other than those shorn on plans by placing
required sections of piers, walls, or superstructures in one
continuous operation.
If excessive bleeding causes water to form on the surface of
the concrete in tall forms the mix shall be made drier to
reduce the bleeding. In tall walls the concrete shall be
placed to a point about a foot below the top of the wall, and
at least one hour, or more if specified by the Engineer, J
shall be allowed for settling. Concreting should then be l]
resumed and completed before set occurs,
D. CONSOLIDATING
1. General,. Each layer of concrete shall be well compacted
and the mortar flushed to the surface of the forms by
continuous working with mechanical vibrators of an
approved type. Vibrators of the type which operate by
attachment to forms will be permitted only when immer-
sion type vibrators cannot be used due to inaccessi-
bility. The vibrators shall be applied to the concrete
immediately after deposit and shall be moved throughout
the Dyer of concrete just placed, and several inches
into the plastic layer below, thoroughly working the
concrete around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures,
and into the corners and angles of the forms until the
concrete is thoroughly compacted. Mechanical vibrators
shall not be operated so that they will penetrate or
disturb layers placed previously which have become
partially set or hardened, and they shall not be used to s
aid the flow of concrete laterally. 1he vibration
shall be of sufficient duration to accomplish thorough
r
I 03300-26
1 ,
r y
J
compaction and complete embedment of reinforcement and
fixtures, but shall not be done to an extent that will
t cause segregation. Vibrators shall be kept constantly
moving in the concrete and shall be applied vertically
a at points uniformly spaced, not farther apart than the
radius over which the vibrator is visibly effective.
II The vibrator shall not be held in one location longer
than is required to produce a liquified appearance on
the surface.
2. Vibrators; Internal vibrators shall maintain a fre-
quency when submerged in the concrete of not less than
6,000 impulses per minute for spuds with diameters
greater than 5 inches and 10,000 impulses for smaller
spuds. The intensity (amplitude) of vibration shall be
sufficient to produce satisfactory consolidation. A
sufficient number of vibrators (powered pneumatically or
electrically) shall be used to provide one for each ten
cubic yards of concrete pper hour being placed. At least
one vibrator, which may be of the gasoline powered type,
shall be immediately available as a standby for each two
vibrators in service. The Engineer may require the
Contractor to use a vibrator of larger size and power if
he feels, based on observed performance, that it is
necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation. All
vibrators intended for regular service or standby
service shall be checked and approved by the Engineer
prior to the beginning of the concreting operations,
E. PLACING CONCRETE IN COLD WEATHER
No concrete shall be placed when the atmospheric temperature
is at or below 40 degrees F. (taken in the shade away from
artificial heat) and falling, unless permission to do so is
given in writing by the Engineer. When such permission is
E given, or in cases where the temperature drops below 40
degrees F. after the concreting operations have been started;
the Contractor shall furnish sufficient canvas and frare work
or other type of housing to enclose and protect the structure
in such a way that the air around the forms and fresh con-
crete can be kept at a temperature not less than 50 degrees
F. for a period of five days after the concrete is placed for
normal concrete, and for three days for high-early-strength
concrete. Sufficient heating apparatus such as stoves,
salamanders, or steam equipment and fuel to furnish all
required heat shall be supplied. It is understood that the
Contractor is responsible for the protection of concrete
placed under any and all weather conditions. Permission
given by the Engineer to place concrete during freezing
weather will in no way relieve the Contractor of the res-
ponsibility for satisfactory results. Should concrete placed
under such conditions prove unsatisfactory, it shall be
removed and replaced.
r
03300-27
a
i
i
F. PLACING CONCRETE IN WATER
Concrete may be deposited in water only when required by the
j plans or with the permission of the Engineer. The forms,
j cofferdams, or caissons shall be sufficiently tight to
prevent any water flowing through the space in which the
concrete is being deposited. Pumping will not be permitted
while the concrete is being placed, nor until it has set for
at least 36 hours. The concrete shall be carefully placed in
a compact mass by means of a tremie, closed bottom-dumping
bucket, or other approved method that does not permit the
: concrete to fall through the water without protection. The
concrete shall not be disturbed after being deposited.
fr Depositing shall be regulated to maintain approximately
horizontal surfaces at all times. When a tremie is used, it
shall consist of a tube constructed in sections having
watertight connections. The means of supporting the tremie
shall permit the movement of the discharge end over the
entire top surface of the work and shall permit the tremie to
be rapidly lowered when necessary to choke off or retard the
flow. The number of times it is necessary to shift the
location of the tremie, for any continuous placement of
concrete, shall be held to a minimum. During the placing of
concrete, the tremie tube shall be kept full to the bottom of
the hopper. When a batch is dumped into the hopper, the
tremie shall be slightly raised, but not out of the concrete
at the bottom, until the batch discharges to the level of the {
bottom of the hopper. The flow shall then be stopped by
lowering the tremie. The placing operations shall be con-
tinuous until the work is completed. When concrete is placed
by means of the bottom-dump-bucket, the bucket shall have a
capacity of not less than one-half cubic yard. The bucket
shall be lowered gradually and carefully until it rests upon " i
the concrete already placed. It shall then be raised very
slowly during the discharge travel; the intent being to
maintain as nearly as possible, still water at the point of
+ discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture.
G. PLACING CONCRETE IN SLABS
Concrete in columns, walls, and deep beams or girders shall
be allowed to stand for at least one hour, or more if speci-
fied by the Engineer, to permit full settlement due to
consolidation before concrete is placed in the slabs they are
to support. Haunches are considered as part of the slab and
shall be placed integrally with them, When monolithic slabs
are placed in strips, the widths of the strips, unless
otherwise specified or shown, shall be such that the concrete
in any one strip will not be allowed to lie in place for more
than one hour before the adjacent strips are placed. Imme-
diately before placing concrete, the earth cushion to receive
03300-28
r
1
concrete shall be thoroughly dampened to prevent too rapid
absorption of moisture from the concrete.
H. PLACING CONCRETE IN FOUNDATIONS i
Concrete in deep foundations shall be placed in a manner that
will avoid segregation of the aggregates or displacement of
the reinforcement. Suitable chutes or vertical pipes shall
i. be provided. When footings can be placed in dry foundation
pits without use of cofferdams or caissons, forms may be
omitted, if desired by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer, and the entire excavation filled with concrete to
1 the elevation of the top of footing, The placing of concrete
1 bases above seal courses will be permitted after the forms
! are free from water and the seal course cleaned. Any
necessary pumping or bailing during the concreting operations
shall be done from a suitable sump located outside the forms.
1. PLACING CONCRETE IN PIERS
+ Concrete placing will begin within eight (8) hours after
completion of drilling and inspection of shaft.
Concrete placing shall be as continuous as practicable from
the beginning of placing in the bottom to the top of shaft or
to construction joints as may be indicated on the plans.
Time intervals will be allowed for vibrating or rodding the
concrete being placed, for pulling casing, for placing forms
and other operations necessarily carried on in sequence with
the placing operations. J
Concrete shall be placed through a suitable tremie tube to 1
prevent segregation of concrete materials and unnecessary
splashing on the reinforcing steel cage. The tremie shall be
made in sections to permit the discharge end to be raised as
the placement progresses. The maximum allowable fall from
the end of tremie for the concrete will be five (5) feet.
Wherever a casing is used, the casing should extend suf-
ficiently above the grade of the finished shaft to provide
excess concrete to be placed for the anticipated slump due to
the casing removal.
Where a cap block or groundline strut is shown on the plans
to be placed at the top of the drilled shaft, and the cap or
strut is shown to be placed monolithic with the drilled
shaft, a time interval will be allowed for placing the
required form and reinforcing after any necessary casing
removal,
After a placement is completed, the top surface shall be
cured and any construction joint area shall be treated as
prescribed elsewhere in these specifications.
03300-29
"'1R
These specifications are written based on the assumption that
ground water can be sealed off in the foundation materials
using a casing with proper procedure, with good equipment,
and with personnel experienced in this type of work. It will
be required that the concrete be placed in the dry in ac-
cordance with the specifications if at all possible. In the
event it is clearly demonstrated that ground water cannot be
thelEngineereshall be agreeable etofpouthe ring uthet shaft o concrete
through water providing the following procedure is followed. ,
1. The bottom of the shaft hole shall be cleaned of mud,
and loose material. Water shall be pumped out as much
as possible immediately ahead of concrete placing to
insure that the bottom is in satisfactory condition.
Flowing water is not permitted,
2. The specifications, and procedure required for under
water pouring of concrete will be as specified above for
"Placing Concrete in Water."
j 3.03 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. FINISHING SLABS i
1. General: Except as elsewhere permitted in these
specifications or as shown on the drawings, all slabs,
platforms and steps shall be finished monolithically.
The following schedule of finishes shall apply, unless
otherwise specified or shown on the plans:
a, Wood Float Finish: Roof slabs, valve vault and
manholes, floor slabs of basins and tops of walls, {
exterior slabs except working platforms.
b. Steel Trowel Finish: All interior slabs and steps,
c. Brush Finish: Exterior steps, walkways, and `
working platform,
i
2. Screeding: As soon as concrete placing operations have
been completed for a slab section of sufficient width to
permit finishing operations, the concrete shall be
approximately leveled and then struck off, tamped, and t
screeded. The screed shall be of a design adaptable to f
the use intended, shall have provision for vertical
adjustment, and shall be sufficiently rigid to hold true
to shape during use.
The initial strike off shall leave the concrete surface
at an elevation slightly above grade so that, when
03300-30
j
"1C
consolidation and finishing operations are completed,
the surface of the slab will be at the grade elevation
shown on the plans. Tamping and screeding operations
shall be continued until the concrete is properly
consolidated and the surface voids are eliminated. The
surface shall then be brought to a smooth true alignment
by means of longitudinal screeding, floating, belting,
and/or other methods approved by the Engineer. When
templates are used, they shall be of such design as to
permit early removal in order to permit satisfactory
finishing at and adjacent to the template.
3. Straightness: While the concrete is still plastic, the
surface shall be straightedged by the use of a standard
ten (10) foot metal straightedge. Each pass of the
straightedge shall lap half of the preceding pass. All
high spots shall be removed and all depressions shall be
filled with fresh concrete and refloated, The checking
with straightedge shall continue during the final
finishing operation until the surface is true to grade
and free of depressions, high spots, voids, or rough
spots. The final surface shall be checked with the
straightedge and ordinates measured from the face of the
straightedge to the surface of the slab shall not exceed
one-sixteenth inch per foot from the nearest point of
contact and the maximum ordinate shall be one-eighth
inch per 10 feet.
a 4. Wood Float Finish: Surfaces shall be finished using a
wood float to a true even plane with no coarse aggregate
visible, in the initial floating, while the concrete
is plastic, sufficient pressure shall be used on the i
wood float to bring all excess moisture to the surface
so that it can be removed. A final "light float" finish
shall be given to the surface as the concrete hardens.
The surface shall have a uniform appearance and shall
meet the straightness requirements.
5, Steel Trowel Finish: After all surface moisture has
disappeared following the initial wood float finish,
surfaces shall be steel trowelled to a smooth, even,
impervious finish of uniform smoothness and color, free i
a from blemishes including trowel marks.
6, Brush Finish: Following the steel trowel finish,
y surface of the concrete shall be brushed lightly with a
soft bristled brush. 'The brush shall be kept clean and
shall be dipped in water frequently so that it will be
clean and wet at all times. Brushing shall be limited
to that necessary to remove the glaze and produce a
nonslip surface.
' 03300-31
4
i
1
7
7. Power-Machine Finish (Option): In lieu of hand finish-
ing, surfaces of slabs requiring wood float finish may
be finished with an approved power finishing machine,
which machine shall be operated in accordance with the
directions of the machine manufacturer. Following
machine finishing, irregularities left by the machine
shall be eliminated by hand trowelling with a steel
trowel. Power machine finishing may also be used as
initial step in finishing surfaces requiring steel
trowel finish; however, for steel trowel finishes the
entire surface shall be given its final finish by hand,
using a steel trowel. Where steel trowel surfaces are
to receive a floor covering, it is not required that
entire surface be hand trowelled, but all irregularities
left by the finishing machine shall be eliminated by
hand trowelling, The preparation of surfaces for
finishing by machine shall in general be as hereinbefore
required for hand finishin~i.
6. Surfaces Requiring Drainage, Where indicated on the
plans, slabs shall be slo pf.,i to provide drainage with 1
such slabs to have a minimum thickness of that shown on
the plans. Where floor drains are shown in slabs and
slope of floor is not indicated, floors shall be sloped
to drain on a grade of one-sixteenth inch (1/16") per
foot with a maximum total slope of one and one quarter -4
inches (1-1/4"). Thickness of slab at floor drain shall
be thickness of slab as indicated on the plans.
0. Sidewalks: Sidewalks shall be given a brush finish,
Sidewalks shall be "flagged" at a spacing equal to the
width of the walk and edged on each side using an
approved tool having a radius of approximately one-
quarter (1/4") inch.
10, Finishing in Hot, Dry Weather: During periods of high
temperature and/or low humidity, extreme care shall be
taken in the finishing of slabs to eliminate initial
shrinkage cracks. Following the initial set of concrete
1 but while the concrete is still "green", finishing shall
continue as required to remove shrinkage cracks which
may occur in the initial set of concrete. In hot, dry - ,
weather, a cement finisher shall remain on the job
following normal finishing operations for a sufficient
length of time to insure the removal of initial shrin-
kage cracks.
i
I
B. FINISHING OF WALLS AND OTHER SURFACES
! 1. General: All concrete shall be finished as specified
hereinunder. Forms for walls, columns and sides of
beams and girders under normal conditions can be removed
E
03300-32
1
t
I
1
in 12-24 hours and all patching, repairing, finishing
and cleaning shall follow immediately after form removal
and shall be completed as soon as practicable but within
7 days of form removal. Careful attention shall be
given to curing as finishing progresses.
i
2. Form Finish:
a. No Finish: For surfaces that are not visible from
inside or outside the completed structure, i.e.
back of retaining walls below embankment, etc.
After forms are removed tie holes and defects shall
be repaired or patched, otherwise no finish is
required.
b. Rough Finish: All surfaces for which this finish is
explicitly indicated or required shall have all tie
holes and defects larger than 1/4" in width or depth
patched or repaired. All fins shall be removed
flush with the adJacent surface by rubbing or
grindilq and rough edges shall be dressed. Other-
wise surfaces shall be left with the texture im-
parted by the forms, a
C. Smooth Finish: Provide smooth form finish for all
z concrete surfaces that are to be exposed to view. a
The form facing material shall produce a smooth,
hard, uniform texture on the concrete. It may be
plywood, tempered concrete-form-grade hard board,
metal, plastic, paper or other approved material.
The arrangement of the facing material shall be
orderly and symmetrical with a minimum number of
seams. Tie holes and defects shall be patched and
r fins shall be removed flush with the adJacent
surface. 1
3. Rubbed Finish: i
a. Smooth Finish: Smooth, rubbed finish shall be produced
on newly hardened concrete no later than the day
following form removal. Surfaces shall be wetted and
rubbed with carborurdum brick or other abrasive until a
uniform color and texture are produced. No cement grout
may be used other than the cement paste drawn from the '
surface by the rubbing process. 1
b. Plaster Mix Finish: Areas designated to receive this 1
r finish are to receive a two (2) coat application of
h THOROSEAL PLASTER MIX, 1/8" to 1/4" in thickness, in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Form
treatments or curing compounds shall not contain any
ingredients which might stain or otherwise prevent a good
l
7
.f
03300-33
3.
I
bond to the concrete. Do not apply when temperature is
40°F or expected to drop below 40°F within 24 hours after
application. Prepare >.urface according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
Apply a key coat of THOROSEAL at a rate of 2 lbs. per sq.
yard by brush using 1 part ACRYL 60 to 3 parts of clean
water. Allow this coat to dry 5 days. Next apply a
trowel coat of THOROSEAL PLASTER MIX using a solution of
1 part of ACRYL 50 and 3 parts clean water. Apply at the f
rate of 4 to 6 lbs, of mix per sq. yard. Apply and cure 1
f according to manufacturer's recommendations.
c. Rubber Floated Finish; Remove forms within 2-3 days.
Remove ties, burrs and fins. Mix equal parts portland
cement and fine sand with water to produce a stiff
mortar. Apply mortar with firm rubber float or trowel !
filling and compressing the mortar into all voids.
Finish with a rubber float using a swirling motion.
4. Concrete Finish Schedule;
Type of Finish Location
Smooth Form Finish and Exterior walls of Lift
(Plaster Mix Finish) Station and Pier to 1'
below finished grade
Rough Finish Interior walls of Lift
Station and exterior
walls lower than 1' below
finished grade
Brush Finish Top of Lift Station,
driveway slab and sidewalk
N
5, Grouting Materials:
a. Non-Shrink Grout - Normal Use; Pre-mixed, factory
packaged, ferrous aggregate mortar grouting compound
complying with CE (Corps of Engineers) CRD-C588, Type M.
Products offered by manufacturers to comply with the
requirements include the following;
Embeco; Master Builders Company
Ferrolith G; Sonneborn
Irontox: Toch Brothers
b.
Non-Shrink Grout - Exposed Use: Pre-mixed, nonstaining,
non-shrink grout shall be Embeco 636 Grout as manufactured
by Master Builders Co., Sonneborn (equal model); or equal,
03300-34
1
C. Grout (Normal Shrinkage): Normal shrinkage grout for
general use shall consist of one (1) part of Portland
Cement (Type II for exposure to sewage and Type I for
other applications) and three (3) parts of clean, first
j quality sand as approved by the Engineer. All
proportioning shall be on a volumetric basis. This
material shall be used for grouting clarifier and
thickener floors and for filling areas of the bar screen,
aeration basis outlet boxes, etc., to prevent the
deposition of solids. '
d. Grouting Pumping and Other Mechanical Equipment: Pumps and
other mechanical equipment shall have a layer of grout
(usually 1" to 3/4') between the concrete floor and the
bottoms of the equipment. Grout shall be non-shrink grout
as pre-mixed Embeco Grout manufactured by Master Builders,
Cleveland, Ohio, Sika Grout as manufactured by Sika
Chemical Corporation, or equal.
All parts of engine generator units and centrifugal blower
units which require grouting shall be grouted with Esco
Weld 7505 epoxy grout as manufactured by Enjay Chemical
+ Co., Houston, Texas, Master Builders (equal model), or
equal. The grout shall be mixed and placed in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
After mixing, the grout shall be quickly and continuously
s placed to avoid overworking, segregation and breaking
down of the initial set. The foundation shall be
thoroughly cleaned, the forms set in place and securely
anchored, with holes or cracks in forms caulked with rags,
cotton waste or dry sand mixture to prevent the loss of
grout, and the necessary materials and tools shall be on
hand before starting grouting operations. An chor bolt
0 holes and the surface of the concrete floor shall be
washed with a liberal amount of water, and any oil or
grease removed with a strong, hot detergent or caustic
solution. Concrete shall be damp when the grout is
1 poured, but shall not have an excess of water to dilute
the grout. No machines shall be in operation in the
vicinity of grouting to cause vibrations which might
affect the setting of the grout. Before final set, cut
back exposed edges 1/2" and refinish with plain sand
cement mortar.
F 3.04 CURING CONCRETE
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Careful attention shall be given to the proper curing of all
concrete. The curing methods shall use sheet materials con-
forming to ASTM C171 or membrane curing compound conforming to
1
3
d 03300-35
t
i
1
j
ASTM C309. Membrane curing is not permitted on surfaces to be
rubbed or on surfaces on which additional concrete, mortar or
terrazzo is to be applied,
Unless the curing method is otherwise noted or specified the
curing method shall be selected by the contractor and sub-
mitted to the Engineer for approval.
` d. LENGTH OF CURING PERIOD
All concrete shall be cured for a period of seven consecutive
days. In cold weather, when curing may be retarded this
period shall be extended until 7 "curing-days" have passed, up
to a limit of 14 consecutive days,
C. CURING-DAY
A "curing-day" shall be any day on which the atmospheric
temperature taken in the shade, or the air temperature
adjacent to the concrete, remains above 50 degrees F. for at
least 18 hours.
D. APPLICATION
1. Sheet Curing: Sheet materials when used shall conform
to the requirements of ASTM C171. They will be in
contact with the entire concrete surface and shall be
applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recom-
mendations. All holes shall be patched and where
pedestrian traffic is unavoidable, suitable walkways
shall be provided to protect the sheet material.
2. Membrane Curing: Membrane curing compound shall comply +
with ASTM C309 Specifications with coloring tint, i
approved by the Engineer, ready for use other than
stirring, and of such composition that it will remain
intact as a sealing coat for 28 days. An acceptable
compound shall have such sealing qualities that the
moisture loss from test specimens shall not be more than
three and one-half percent when tested in accordance
with Method of Test for Water Retention Efficiency of
Methods of Curing Concrete, ASTM Designation C156 when
the sealing compound is applied at a coverage of
one-hundred and fifty square feet per gallon. The
sealing compound shall be sprayed on, using pressure
tank type spraying equipment, and the sealing compound
1 shall he thoroughly mixed gust before and during
application by either a power-operated mechanical
1 stirrer or compressed air. Curing compound shall be
strained through gasoline strainer as it is poured into
spraying equipment. Application of the seal coat shall
be on a moist surface, shall be uniform as indicated by
03300 •.36
.
i
,
the color, and shall be at the rate of one gallon per
150 square feet, applied in one coat on horizontal
- surfaces. On vertical surfaces curing compound shall
be applied uniformly in two coats at the rate of 300
square feet per gallon for each coat. The application
of the curing compound shall follow immediately after
j removal of forms and preparation of concrete surface as
specified. Within thirty minutes after form removal on
any surface to be cured by membrane, patching shall be
commenced or the surface shall be kept wet by sprinkling
until patching is commarred. Curing compound shall be
applied lmmedial:e1j arter any patch is made unless other
curing is provid,M Seal coats shall remain in place
and be protected against abrasive action for a period of
28 days if in an area where 14-day curing is required
and 14 days if in an area where 7-day curing is requir-
ed. Seal coats on slabs shall be protected by a
one-inch layer of sand or earth or by other approved ,
means. The protective coating shall not be placed
p sooner than 24 hours after the seal coat has been
r applied. Any damages to the membrane coating within the
< period of time noted above shall be repaired immediately
by a liberal application of the compound.
3.05 FILLING TIE HOLES
After the tie rods are broken back or removed, the holes shall be
filled solid with non-shrink cement-sand mortar thoroughly cleaned
to remove all grease and loose particles then the mortar shall be
as dry as practicable and carefully packed into the holes in small
quantities. After the holes are completely filled, all excess
mortar shall be struck off flush and the surface finished in such
a manner as to render the filled hole as inconspicuous as poss-
ible. If these patches appear to be darker than the other
surface of the concrete, white cement shall be used in the mortar
99 as required.
3.06 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. GENERAL
Any defective work discovered after the forms have been
removed shall be repaired immediately. If the surface of the
concrete is bulged, uneven, or shows excess honeycombing, or
form marks, which defects in the opinion of the Engineer,
cannot be repaired satftfactorily, the entire section shall
be removed and replaced.
f
' B. PATCHING
1 Slight honeycomb and minor defects in all concrete surfaces
1 shall be patched with cement mortar mixed in the same pro-
03300-37
1'
i
portions of cement and fine aggregate as the original con-
crete. Finished surfaces containing sand streaks or voids
will not be acceptable, and shall be repaired by cutting out
the unsatisfactory material and replacing it with dry pack
mortar which shall be securely keyed and bonded to the old
concrete and finished in such a manner as to render the
jointing as inconspicuous as possible. This concrete shall
be drier than the regular mixture and shall be thoroughly 'r
tamped into place. Each defective area shall be cut back
with pneumatic chipping tool as deep as the defect extends
and in no case less than one inch. The holes shall then be i
painted with an approved bonding agent, such as Darweld C,
and then filled to within three-fourths inch of the surface
with approved non-shrink mortar as directed by the Engineer
and the remainder of the hole filled with regular dry pack
mortar. Holes less than three-fourths inch deep shall be
filled with non-shrink cement-sand mortar for the full depth.
The surface of such patches shall then be finished as speci-
fied for tie holes. All dry pack mortar shall be driven into
place with suitable hammer and wooden blocks.
END OF SECTION
a
f i
r
J
v
+
r
03300-38
T
1
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Furnish all labor and material, equipment and incidentals neces-
sary to perform all fabrication of all structural steel shown on I
the drawings and specified herein. Furnish all structural steel
shapes, columns, base plates, fabricated components and bolts,
washers, nuts, rivets or other fasteners necessary to complete the
work.
Furnish all labor and equipment for the delivery and erection of
structural steel components at the job site, including all tem-
porary bracing, guying, supports, etc., that may be necessary 1
during erection. Erection procedure shall be in compliance with
governmental safety standards currently in effect.
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit six (6) copies of complete and detailed shop drawings in 1
accordance with Section 01001, Paragraph 1.27, SHOP DRAWINGS,
to the Engineer for approval. Shop drawings shall include all items
which require manufacture or fabrication and shall show all sizes and
arrangement of members, character of construction, strength of
connections and fabrication details.
I Drawings indicate the design, sections and weights of members.
Substitutions will NOT be permitted except upon written per-
mission. Dimensions scaled from the drawings shall not be used
for fabrication and the Contractor shall determine actual dimen-
sions of the structure. t
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS
Applicable provisions of the current editions of the following
codes are hereby incorporated in this specification and shall
govern all work to the same extent as if found herein:
AISC, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"
# i
AISC, "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of
Structural Steel for Buildings"
AWS, D1.1-82 American Welding Society, "Structural Welding
Code-Steel"
AISC, "Specification for ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts"
05120-1
i
f
1.04 SHOP FABRICATION INSPECTION
The Owner through its Engineer reserves the right to inspect all
f
may abrication procedures, including welding; and at his own expense j
tests appoint an
such
te
desirable. The n fabricator Laboratory shall give t access perform to the
Engineer at all times during fabrication of work under this
contract.
The fabricator shall give notice when fabrication is underway. In
addition, he shall furnish the inspector a set of approved shop j
3
drawings during inspection tours.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS ~ 4
A. STRUCTURAL STEEL "
Unless otherwise noted on plans, all structural steel shall
conform to the Standard Specification ASTM A6, latest edition,
and shall meet the following:
Yield Strength ASTM Designation
360000 psi A 36
B. UNFINISHED BOLTS AND NUTS
Unfinished bolts and nuts shall conform to ASTM Standard A307
and shall be the regular hexagon-bolt type.
C. TURNED BOLTS AND NUTS
Bolts and nuts not otherwise designated shall conform to ASTM
A 307.
] 0. HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS AND NUTS
Bolts and nuts shall conform to ASTM Specifications A-325.
Bolt and nut dimensions and threads shall be in accordance
with American Standard B 18.2 for regular semi-finished
hexagon bolts and heavy semi-finished hexagon nuts, i
E. WASHERS
'f
Round washers shall conform to American Standard B 27.21 Type
f B. Washers in contact with high-strength bolt heads and nuts
shall be hardened in accordance with ASTM Standard A-325.
Beveled washers shall be square, smooth, and sloped so that
j
contact surfaces of bolt head and nut are parallel. The
05120-2
l
C
diameter of the hole of square-beveled washers shall be 1/16"
greater than the bolt size for bolts not larger than 1", and
1/8" greater than the bolt size for bolts larger than V.
,
F. FILLER METAL FOR WELDING
(1) Welding electrode for manual schedules metal arc-welding
shall conform to AWS Specifications. Bare electrodes and
granular flux used in submerged-arc process shall conform
t to Section 1.4.8 of AISC "Specifications for the Design,
Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings."
(2) Only E 70 Series electrodes for manual arc welding and
electrodes conforming to AWS A5.17-80 for submerged arc
process shall be used for welding A36 steel.
s
G. SHOP PAINT
Shop painting shall be as specified in Section 09505, PAINTING.
w S`h1 fi4 . t t
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION
ia Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified, the
fabrication of structural steel shall be in accordance with the
,s American Institute of Steel Construction "Specifications for the
Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Build -
ings," latest edition.
Structural members consisting primarily of a single rolled shape
and shall be straight within appropriate tolerances. Compression ~
members shall not deviate from straightness by more than 1/100 of !
F the axial length between points which are to be laterally sup-
ported.
A variation of 1/32" is permissible in the overall length of
members with both ends milled. Members without milled ends which
are to be framed to other steel parts of the structure may have a
variation from the detailed length not greater than 1/16" for
members 30'0"or less in length and not greater than 1/8" for
members over 30'0"in length.
The use of gas cutting preferably by machine is permissible pro-
vided the metal cut is not carrying stresses during the operation,
' Gas cut edges which will be subjected to substantial stress or
w
any goules hich have weld metal deposited on them shall be free from gouges;
To determine hthereffective mwidth iof memberse so removed
1/8" gshall nbe
deducted from each gas cut edge. The radius of re-entrant gas cut
fillets shall be as large as practicable, but never less than 1
05120-3
,j .
l
i
Planing or finishing of sheared or gas cut edges of plates or
shapes will not be required unless specifically called for on the
drawings, except that all edges to be fitted to other members by
welding, such as columns at bearing plate shall be milled.
Compression joints depending upon contact bearing, shall have the
bearing faces truly machined to a common plane. All other joints
shall be cut straight. All columns and stiffeners shall be milled
to give full bearing over the cross section.
Provide all necessary steel bearing plates for reactions of beams
and columns, and connection stiffeners and gussets whether +
specifically shown on plans or not.
3.02 BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
Holes for bolts shall be 1/16" larger than the nominal diameter of
the bolt. If the thickness of the material is not greater than
the nominal diameter of the bolt plus 1/8", the holes may be
punched. If the thickness of the material is greater than the
nominal diameter of the bolt plus 1/8", the holes shall be either
drilled from the solid, or sub-punched and reamed.
Holes that must be enlarged to admit. bolts shall be reamed. Poor
matching of holes shall be cause of rejection.
r
When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent to
the washers, shall be free of scale except tight mill scale. They
shall be free of dirt, loose scale, burrs, and other defects that
would prevent solid seating of the parts. Contact surfaces within
friction-type joints shall be free of oil, paint, lacquer or
galvanizing.
All A-325 bolts shall be tightened to a bolt tension not less than
the proof load given in the applicable ASTM Specifications for the
type of bolt used. Tightening shall be done with properly calibrated
wrenches, by the turn-of-nut method, or by use of approved calibrated
washers, such as Bethlehem "Load Indicator Washer."
3.03 WELDED CONSTRUCTION
Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust,
grease, paint, and any other foreign material except that mill
scale withstanding vigorous wire brushing may remain. Joint
surfaces shall be free from fins and tears. Preparation of edges
by gas cutting shall, wherever practicable, be done by mechani-
cally guided torch.
The Technique of welding employed, the appearance and quality of
welds made, and methods used in correcting defective work shall j
conform to Section 4 "Technique", of the Current Edition of
the "Structural Welding Code-Steel" by the American Welding Society. 1
05120-4
T
r
r
Welds siiall be made only by welders and welding operators who have
been previously qualified by tests as prescribed in the American
Welding Society's "Structural Welding Code-Steel", to perform the
type of work required.
3.04 SHOP CLEANING AND PAINTING
After inspection and approval and before leaving the shop, all
steel work shall be thoroughly cleaned by effective means of all
loose scale, rust, splatter, slag, flux, deposit, oil, dirt, and
other foreign matter, in accordance with ASTM A123 and A386.
Except where to be encased in concrete, or edges to be field
welded, all steel shall be given one shop coat of rust-inhibi-
tive primer, as specified in Section 09905, PAINTING.
y All machine finished surfaces shall be protected against corrosion
by an approved coating.
" 3.05 ERECTION OF STEEL
Steel shall be erected in accordance with the Standard Specifi-
cations of the American Institute for Steel Construction. All
erection shall be performed by workmen experienced in this form of
work.
The framing shall be carried up true and plumb and temporary
bracing shall be introduced wherever necessary to take care of all
loads to which the structure may be subjected, including erection
1 equipment and its operation. Such bracing shall be left in place
as long as may be required for safety. It shall finally be
removed by the Contractor as part of his equipment. As erection
progresses, the work shall be securely connected to take care of +
" all -'ead load, wind, and erection stresses.
3.06 BOLTED FIELD CONNECTION
High strength bolts shall be used for- field connections, and shall
have a suitable identifying mark on top the head.
Tightening of nuts shall be done with properly calibrated wrenches
or by the turn-of-nut method. The minimum bolt tension for the
size of bolt used shall be in accordance with tables listed in the
above-referenced standards. When calibrated wrenches are used, ( I
each wrench shall be checked for accuracy at least once daily for
actual conditions of applications. Approved load indicator washers
(Bethlehem) may be used. +
3.07 WELDED FIELD CONNECTION
Welds shall be made only by operators who have previously qualified
by tests, as prescribed by the "Standard Qualifications Procedure" in
the "Structural Welding Code-Steel" by the American Welding Society,
05120-5
LLIEN
i
~ J
i
tc perform the type of work required. The Contractor shall provide
the certification that welders have passed qualification test within
six months Just prior to performance of work. All field welds shall ~
be of the type indicated on the drawings or specified herein. All
welding must be approved.
1 E
i
3,08 CUTTING HOLES
The use of a gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting
fabrication errors will be permitted on structural framing members
F 3 provided that approval of the Engineer is first obtained for each
specific condition.
3.09 SETTING PLATES
f Column base plates and leveling plates shall be set level to
correct elevations and temporarily supported on steel wedges or
r shims until the supported members have been plumbed and grouted.
The entire bearing area under plates shall be grouted solid with
! nonshrink grout.
3.10 TEMPLATES
I Templates shall be furnished as indicated on drawings. The
Contractor shall furnish instructions for the setting of anchors,
connection details, and bearing plates and shall ascertain that the
items are properly set during the progress of the work.
t:
t
LdD OF SECTION f
i
,
' I
i
1
05120-6
r
I
r.
!
i
' r
,
I
i
05710 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
1.04 GENERAL q
1.01 SCOPE
T
Furnish and install all miscellaneous and ornamental specialty
metal work shown on the drawings or specified herein. Provide
anchors, hangers, rods, bars, brackets or fasteners required to
complete this work and to connect to work by others. Provide
inserts for concrete where necessary.
Submit six (6) copies of shop drawings for all miscellaneous metals
in accordance with Section 01001, Paragraph 1.27. SHOP DRAWINGS, for
Engineer's approval prior to beginning any work. 1
1.02 FABRICATION
When a specific manufacturer's article or apparatus is specified,
it shall be applied, assembled, or otherwise installed in accor-
dance with the manufacturer's specifications.
Insofar as possible, all items shall be shop fabricated and
assembled ready for erection. Fabricate articles to proper shape
with sharp lines and smooth surfaces. Connections shall be
securely welded, bolted or riveted and welds shall be dressed
smooth on exposed surfaces. Thickness of metal and component
parts shall be of size adequate to withstand strains reasonably
anticipated for its usage. Provide lugs, rabbets or brackets to
allow for proper assembly and close fit. Exposed edges and ends
of metal shall be dressed smooth where exposed.
Castings shall be of proper design, sound and exposed parts shall
have no blemishes. Remove fins, casting lugs, or other unneces-
sary parts, grind rough edges and shape for fit with other com-
ponent parts.
2.00 MATERIALS
A, STEEL ROLLED SHAPES
ASTM A36, having a minimum yield strength not less than
36,000 psi.
B, MISCELLAWEnUS STEEL
i
ASTM A-36. Plates and bars shall conform to ASTM A•-284.
a
j
05710-1
i
r
ti
If
r
C. CAST STEEL, GENERAL PURPOSE
ASTM A-27, Grade 65-35.
i D. CAST STEEL, STRUCTURAL
ASTM A148, Grade 80-50.
E. STEEL FORGINGS
1 II
~P. ASTM A668 Class C or F.
F. CAST IRON
Soft, gray iron, ASTM A-48, Class 30, 30,000 psi tensile
strength. Accessories and connections shall be steel unless
F noted otherwise.
G. GALVANIZING
r Galvanized metals shall conform to ASTM A-123 and ASTM A-386.
} H. WELDING ELECTRODES
„I Electrodes shall be of the type required for the purpose
intended. Use E70 series for manual arc welding.
I. ALUMINUM
Aluminum shall be of an alloy suitable for the function
intended. Finish shall be as noted on the drawings, other-
wise shall be of recognized industry standard for the type of
component.
i
0. FASTENERS
Fasteners shall be of the type required for the purpose
he t type and shall be of
intended
a standard aplication
of components, a Fas-
teners teners industry shall include:
Masonry Sleeve Anchors - Molly "Parasleeve", Ramset "Dynaeolt"
or approved equal.
Concrete Expansion Bolts - Hilti "Kwik Bolt" or approved equal.
Hollow Wa11 Fasteners - Hilti "Kwik Tog" or approved equal.
Plaster and Drywall Anchor - Plastic insert wedges.
Adhesive Anchors - Hilti "HVA" Adhesive Anchor or approved
equal.
05710-2
i
• "'sic
K. SHOP PAINT
All ferrous metals shall receive one coat of rust-inhibitive
primer as specified in Section 09905, PAINTING.
3.00 EXECUTION z
3.01 MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL FABRICATION
Steel components shall be shop fabricated of standard struc-
f~Y tural shapes, or bent plates to the designs shown on the drawings.
Frames shall be shop assembled by welding or bolting. Set frames
` in place plumb, level and square in all directions and securely
t brace to prevent displacement until built into construction.
3.02 MISCELLANEOUS FABRICATION
Fabricate all miscellaneous steel components, rack, stands,
supports, or other items to the design noted on the drawings and
utilizing structural shapes, bent plates, sheet steel or other
.{F=l material as required to construct the item. Generally, asseirhly
shall be by welding with all joints ground smooth. Provide
eft' brackets, fillets plates
and anchor
bolts
as required and fi
with one coat of shop paint. finish
# 3.03 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMES
Fabricate frames as detailed by welding, bolting or fasteners
using best modern practice. Frames shall be true to dimension and
shall be set plumb and securely braced to prevent displacement
' until built into construction.
Provide welding frames at each roof penetration for mechanical
equipment, including exhaust fans, flues and ventilators. Frames
shall be field welded across top chords of steel Joist arid shall
be of sizes required by equipment. Provide holes in outstanding
angle legs for bolting wood curbs.
3.04 WELDED FIELD CONNECTION
Welds shall be made only by operators who have previously qualified
by tests, as prescribed by the "Standard Qualifications Procedure" of
the "Structural We'iding Code-Steel" by the American Welding Society
to perform the type of work required. The Contractor shall provide
the certification that welders have passed qualification test within
six months gust prior to performance of work. All field welds shall
be of the type indicated on the drawings or specified herein. All
k welding must be approved.
05710-3
1
i
i
i
3.05 STEEL PIPE HANDRAILS
Where shown on the Plans, fabricate steel handrails as indicated on
the drawings. Handrails shall be shop fabricated using 1-112" I.P.S.
Schedule 40 steel pipe with all welded construction. Connect hand-
rails to stair stringers in field and weld each part completely
around. Grind welds smooth at all joints. Return handrail to wall
at all ends and anchor with wall flanges. Provide wall brackets as
noted of malleable iron with concealed fasteners.
3.06 ALUMINUM HATCHWAY
Aluminum hatchways for valve vaults shall be a single leaf floor
i access door as manufactured by the Bilco Company, Babcock-Davis or
approved equal.
Frame shall be 1/4" extruded aluminum with built-in neoprene cushion j
and with strap anchors bolted to exterior. Door leaf shall be 1/2"
aluminum diamond plate reinforced with aluminum stiffeners as ,
i required. Cast steel hinges shall be bolted to underside and pivot
on torsion bars that counterbalance the door for easy operation. The
door shall open to 90 degrees and lock automatically in that
position. A vinyl grip handle shall be provided to release the cover
{ for closing. Doors shall be built to withstand a live load of 150
pounds per square foot, and equipped with a snap lock and removable
handle. Mill finish, with bituminous coating, to be applied to
111E exterior of frame by manufacturer. Hardware shall be cadmium plated. l
Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Manufacturer shall guarantee against defects in material or workman-
ship for a period of five years.
f. ~
Doors shall have provisions for padlocking to present unauthorized
entry. Y
Aluminum hatchways for the submersible pumps shall be supplied by the
pump manufacturer as specified in Section 11414, SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE
PUMPS.
3.07 GRAVITY EXHAUST VENTS
' Exhaust cap for vent pipe in vaults and elsewhere as shown on the
Plans shall be Breidert Air-x-Hauster, Type L, gravity ventilator
made from 26 gauge galvanized sheet metal, or approved equal®. Inlet
rain cap shall be 26 gauge galvanized flue cap. Copper insect
screens shall be provided on both vents.
Steel pipe for vents shall be standard weight mill pipe meeting the
j requirements of AWWA C-200. Painting shall be in accordance with
Section 09905, PAINTING.
END OF SECTION
05710-4
,
1
1
I d
t i
1
09905 PAINTING
1.00 GENERAL
F
1,01 SCOPE
The work covered by this item of the Specifications includes
furnishing all paint, labor, and materials and performing all
~s . operations in accordance with this section of the Specifications
and the applicable portion of the Plans.
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, equipment and
services for cleaning and painting of surfaces as follows:
' A. All metal work, equipment and machinery (except stainless
steel, aluminum, and architectural work). Y;
B. All exposed piping except PVC piping (including existing ¢ 1
piping).
C. All structural steel.
M Finish field painting shall not be applied to machinery, equipment i
or other piping until operational tests are completed.
1.02 STORAGE AND CLEAN-UP
The Contractor shall use one convenient location at each site for
;
;
keepinn all materials and doing all mixing, etc. Floor of this
space shall be properly protected with drop cloths. Oily rags and
waste shall be frequently removed and under no circumstances shall {
they be allowed to accumulate. At the completion of the work, the
Contractor shall clean off all paint spots, oil and stain from all k
surfaces and leave the entire project in a satisfactory condition. s
1.03 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete shop j
drawings on the paint in accordance with Article 6.21 of the General
Conditions, SHOP DRAWINGS. All of the data shall, be complete
shall include a complete description of the paint system
including color codes and all pertinent engineeingddatashaquiredifor
a complete evaluation of the submittal) Submittal such form and so presented that the Engineer may readily review the
data.
. S+
09905-1
i+
1
i "
I
2,00 PRODUCTS
i
2.01 MATERIALS
A. GENERAL
Coatings shall be delivered to the job In original containers ;
marked with the name of the manufacturer and the sl.,ecifica-
tion number. The coating shall not show excessive settling
in a freshly opened full can and shall be easily redispursed
with a paddle to a smooth, homogenous state. It shall show
no curdling, Iivering, caking, or color separation and shall
ba free from lumps and skins.
` r Only the highest grade paint of each manufacturer and that
which is suitable for the use intended will be approved.
Only those thinners and solvents specified in the paint i
formulas shall be used. More than the prescribed amount of
thinner may be added only to the extent of maintaining the t
minimum spreading rate designated in each individual formu- ! i
lation. ,
The Contractor shall obtain for the Engineer a color code
which will show the various shades, colors, etc., necessary
for the respective surfaces indicated.
Color coding of pipework shall meet the requirements of the J
Texas Department of Health,
B. RUST PENETRATING PRIMER
This primer shall be the best grade primer recommended by the
finish coating manufacturer for use under the metal protec-
tive paint. Primer and finish coats mast be the product of
one manufacturer.
1
C, ENAMEL PAINT
Paint for exterior surfaces shall be Tnemec Enduratone,
DuPont DULUY,, Metal Protective, Koppers Rustarmor, Mobil
(equal), or approved equal. The color shall be factory mixed i
and all paint for this project shall be from the same mixed
batch. Chips shall be submitted to the Owner for final i
is
color selection, f
D. EPOXY PAINT i
Paint for all suhmerged and above water surfaces for the pumps,
j valves, piping and vents shall be Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build i i
„ J Epoxoline Epoxy-Pdyamide Coating. System of color and number
specified herein, as manufactured by Tnemec Company, Inc,, Mobil
09905.2
• j,
Series 78 Series, or approved equal. In the event the Contrac-
tor wishes to substitute the products of another manufacturer,
then he shall apply to the Engineer in writing requesting
permission for the substitution, and shall furnish with his
request complete descriptive materials on the product he
proposes to use.
2.02 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES
A. GENERAL
All surfaces shall be suitably cleaned before applying
coatings. All mill scale, rust, and other foreign matter
shall be removed by sandblasting or pickling as specified
below.
B. FIELD PREPARATION OF SURFACES
i
All of the submerged and above water metal surfaces and areas
adjacent to welds and other areas where the shop primer has been
damaged shall be cleaned to near white metal by sandblasting in
accordant- with SSPC SP10, using 16 to 35 mesh sand. Due
precaution shall be taken during sandblasting operations to
prevent gouging and channeling of the metal caused by excessive
localized sandblasting.
i
All metal surfaces exposed only to the elements and direct sun-
light shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mill scale, rust, and
other foreign matter by sandblasting to a gray metal in accor-
dance with SSPC-S?6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning". All sand-
blasting shall be done after erection unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
My surface that is sandblasted shall be thorouqhly cleaned of
sand and dust and the surface coated the same day it is sand-
blasted. All sand used in sandblasting operations, rust, paint
and scale accumulating from cleaning operations, and all other
material shall be removed by the Contractor. All sandblasted
surfaces shall be swept clean again after all blasting is
completed. In the event that sandblasted surfaces are not
coated immediately after cleaning and rust reforms on sand-
blasted surfaces, such rusty surface shall be re-cleaned by
sandblasting again immediately before coating.
C. SHOP PREPARATION OF SURFACES
All exterior metal surfaces may be shop cleaned by either
pickling or blasting as described below. Heavy deposits of oil,
grease, etc., shall be removed as required before pickling or
blasting. Prime and finish coats shall be as specified and are
the same for either cleaning method.
d
,
J
09905-3
6
a
.4
1. Pickling: All steel shall be pickled in a suitable
solution of hot sulphuric, hydrochloric, or phosphoric
acid for the time required to remove all mill scale,
rust, and scale. The solution shall contain an inhibi-
tor to prevent base metal attack. After draining momen-
tarily, all steel shall be thoroughly rinsed with water. ;
Following water rinsing, the steel shall be immersed in
hot dilute phosphoric acid to further neutralize the j
surface and to provide a rust inhibitive iron phosphate
paint base. The primer shall be applied while the steel
is still warm except for the case of large assemblies
w where the separate parts must be pickled before assem-
bling.
2. Blasting: All exterior steel surfaces shall be grit
blasted to remove all mill scale, rust and scale. To
insure proper cleaning, the metal surfaces shall be
blasted to a gray metal finish and the maximum particle E w
. size shall be no larger than that passing a 16 inch
screen. The blasted surface shall be primed immediately
after cleaning and free of dust, oil or moisture at the
time of painting.
0. Workmanship
All paint and finishing materials shall be applied by skilled
workmen and shall be brushed or sprayed in even, thorough
coats, without runs, crazing, sags or other blemishes. All
coats, regardless of the material, shall be thoroughly dry
before applying succeeding coats. Full drying time as {
recommended by the manufacturer of the particular paint
involved shall be allowed between coats. Enamel, paint, or
shellac shall be properly sanded between coats. All products
shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
! 3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACES TO BE PAINTED
A. SUBMERGED METAL SURFACES
All submerged and above water metal surfaces shall be coated
i with an epoxy as specified herein. The epoxy 1 in ing shat 1 be
applied in a minimum of two (2) coats as follows:
Approximate Dry Film
Thickness idils
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline 4 - 6
Light Buff Color
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline 4 6
Gray Color
09905-4
i`
I
r
Storage mixing, straining, thinning, and application of paint
shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
After two coats have been applied, the paint film thickness
will be checked by the Engineer. The total final dry film
r thickness shall not be less than 10.0 mils. (Thousandths of
an inch) as measured by an elcometer or equivalent. If 10.0
mils are not obtained in two coats, additional finish coats
shall be added until a minimum of 10.0 mils is obtained. A
stripe coat of epoxy primer shall be applied on all edges,
I welds, and crevices before the first prime coat is applied,
n
r" The Engineer will also check the entire coated surface with a
Tinker and Razor K-1 Holiday Detector, or equal. Areas
containing holidays shall receive additional finish coats i
until holiday- free.
At least one week shall be allowed for drying time for finished i
" system before placing equipment in service. ±
0. MISCELLANEOUS METAL SURFACES
All exposed structural steel, handrails, stairs, and machinery,
shall be given one coat of rust-inhibitive primer and two coats i
of machinery enamel as specified in Paragraphs 2.01B and 2,01C.
Items of metal that have received shop coats shall have such
shop coats touched up and be given two field coats of machinery
enamel as specified above.
Aluminum surfaces in contact or embedded in concrete shall be
treated in accordance with Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE,
ENO OF SECTION
}
i
3 1
1
r
I
09905-5
t
11000 GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS
1.01 SCOPE
These General Equipment Stipulations apply, in general, to all
equipment. They supplement the detailed equipment specifications
but in case of conflict the detailed equipment specifications
shall govern.
1.02 COORDINATION
The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for coordination
of the entire project, including verification that all structures,
piping, and equipment components to be furnished and installed by
him are compatible. For equipment to be furnished by Owner and
installed under this contract, the Contractor shall be responsible
for proper installation, startup and all necessary adjustments so
>i that the equipment is placed in proper operating condition. The
E=r Contractor shall also be responsible for coordinating with other
separate contractors as required for complete installation and
operation of equipment.
1.03 ADAPTATION OF EQUIPMENT
` Equipment to be furnished and installed under this contract shall
be readily adaptable for installation and operation in the
structures shown on the drawings. No responsibility for altera-
tion of a planned structure to accommodate other types of equip-
ment will be assumed by the Owner. Equipment which requires
alteration of the structures will be considered only if the
( Contractor assumes all responsibility for making and coordinating
all necessary alterations. All such alterations shall be made at
the Contractor's expense,
1.04 PATENT ROYALTIES
All royalties and fees for patents covering materials, articles,
f apparatus, devices, or equipment (as distinguished from processes)
shall be included in prices quoted by equipment suppliers.
1.05 EQUIPMENT GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment furnished and
installed by him under this contract against (a) faulty or
inadequate design, (b) improper assembly or erection, (c)
defective workmanship or materials, and (d) leakage, breakage, or
other failure. For equipment furnished by Owner and installed
f under this contract, the Contractor shall guarantee against
f leakage, breakage or other failure due to improper assembly or
J erection and against improper installation of the equipment. The
1 guarantee period shall be as defined in the General Requirements. i
11000-1
iYtrr
I
1,06 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in
accordance with the best modern engineering and shop practice.
Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gages
so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in
the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be Interchange-
able. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior '
to delivery, except as required by tests.
Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. Iron castings
shall be tough, close-grained gray iron free from blowholes,
flaws, or excessive shrinkage and shall conform to ASTM A48.
Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous
fabricated steel used in items of equipment shall conform to the d
Standards of the American Institute of Steel Construction. All
structural members shall be considered as subject to shock or
vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel which will
be submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the
equipment shall be at least 1/4 inch thick.
I 1.06 LUBRICATION
, i
Equipment shall be adequately lubricated by systems which require
attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous i
operation. Lubrication systems shall not require attention
during startup or shutdown and shall not waste lubricants,
I
Lubricants of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer,
I cross referenced with major oil company lubricants, shall be ~
provided in sufficient quantity to fill all lubricant reservoirs
and to replace all consumption during testing, startup, and
operation prior to acceptance of equipment by the Owner.
1.08 ELECTRIC MOTORS
Unless otherwise required by the detailed equipment specifi-
cations, moors furnished with equipment shall comply with the
following;
A. Motors shall be designed and applied in compliance with NEMA,
ANSI, IEEE, and AFBMA standards and the NEC for the specific
duty imposed by the driven equipment.
8. Where frequent starting occurs, motors shall be designed for
frequent starting duty equivalent to the duty service
required b,v the driven equipment.
C. Unless recognized and defined by the standards and codes for I
1 intermittent duty as a standard industry practice, all motors
J
a
11000-?.
shall be rated for continuous duty at 40°C. ambiei"t, Motor
temperature rise above 40°C. ambient on continuous operation
t at nameplate horsepower shall not exceed the NEMA limit,
D. Motors shall be designed for full voltage starting.
E. Motor bearing life shall be based upon the actual operating
load conditions imposed by the driven equipment,
F. Motors shall be sized for the altitude at the location where
the equipment is to be installed.
G. Motors shall be sized so that, under maximum continuous load
imposed by the driven equipment, the motor nameplate horse-
power for continuous operation in 40°C, ambient is at least
15 percent more than the driven load.
r
H. Where the detailed specifications call for encapsulated motor
D, windings, the motor shall have a sealed insulation system
designed for a more severe environment than usual varnish
treatments can withstand. The insulation system shall be
General Electric "Poly seal", Allis-Chalmers "Poxeal", or U.S.
Motors "Everseal Motors in this case may be single voltage
rated,
' I. Motors shall have a clamp-type grounding terminal inside the i
4 motor conduit box.
r J. Motors with external conduit buxes shall have oversized
conduit boxes.
It is the intent of this general specification to allow the
manufacturer's standard motor on integrally constructed motor
driven equipment such as appliances, hand tools, etc., that
is specified by model number in which a redesign of the
complete unit would be required for a motor with other
features as may be specified herein.
Unless otherwise required by the detailed equipment specifi-
cations, motors within the horsepower ranges indicated below
shall be rated and constructed as follows:
(1) Below 112 HP;
A. 115 volt, 60 hz., single phase.
i
k~ B. Dripproof or totally enclosed, supplier's option.
C. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings,
x 0. Built-in manual-reset thermal protector; or {
furnished with integrally mounted stainless steel
enclosed manual motor-overload switch.
11.000-3
rS`;{
i
I
(2) 1/2 to 1 HP:
A. 230/460 volt, 60 hz., 3 phase.
B. Dripproof or totally enclosed, supplier's option.
C. Specially insulated for use in damp locations below
20 C.
D. Permanently lubricated eealed bearings.
1. 5
(3) 1-1/2 HP and Above:
A. 230/460 volt, 60 hz., 3 phase.
B. Dripproof or totally enclosed, supplier's option,
C. Specially insulated for use in damp locations below
20 C.
D. Oil or grease lubricated antifriction or oil
lubricated sleeve bearings.
E. Vertical motors shall have 15 year average-life
thrust bearings.
1,09 SAFETY GUARDS
All belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, and other moving j
or rotating parts shall be covered on all sides by a safety guard.
Safety guards shall be fabricated from 16 USS gage or heavier
galvanized or aluminum-clad sheet steel or 1/2 inch mesh gal-
vanized expanded metal, Each guard shall be designed for easy
{ installation and removal. All necessary supports and accessories
shall be provided for each guard. Supports and accessories,
including boi4s, shall be galvanized. All safety guards in i
outdoor locations shall be designed to prevent the entrance of IJ
rain and dripping water.
1,10 ANCHOR BOLTS
Equipment suppliers shall furnish suitable anchor bolts for each
item of equipment. Anchor bolts, together with templates or
setting drawings, shall be delivered sufficiently early to permit
setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed.
Two nuts shall be furnished for each bolt,
i Unless otherwise shown or specified, anchor bolts for items of
I equipment mounted on baseplates shall be long enough to permit
1-1/2 inches of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide
adequate anchorage into structural concrete.
11aoo-4
r
i
Unless otherwise shown, anchor bolts, nuts, and wishers shall be
hot-dip galvanized in conformity with ASTM A15~ and A385, or zinc
plated in conformity with ASTM A105, Type GS. {
1.11 SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment Shall be
furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and
accessories required for proper maintenance. Equipment requiring
special devices for lifting or handling shall be P.mnished I
complete with those devices.
1.12 PROTECTION
All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely
enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage.
All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements and
shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times. Pumps, motors,
electrical equipment, and other equipment having antifriction or r
r. sleeve bearings shall be stored in weathertight warehouses which k
are maintained at a temperature at least 60° F.
Painted surfaces shall be protectea against impact, abrasion,
discoloration, and other damage. All painted surfaces which are
damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the I
satisfaction of the Engineer. j
Electrical equipment, controls, and insulation shall be protected 1
i against moisture or water damage, All space heaters provided in s
the equipment shall be kept connected and operating at all times
i until equipment is placed in service.
1.13 INSTALLATION CHECK
An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the
manufacturer or supplier of each item of equipment to be furnished
and installed under this contract shall visit the site of the work
and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment
installation. In each case, the equipment suppliers represen-
tative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation.
The equipment supplier's representative shall revisit the Job site
as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the
equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the
opinion of the Engineer.
Each equipment supplier's representative shall furnish to the
Owner, through the Engineer, a written report certifying that the
equipment (1} has been properly installed and lubricated, (2) is
in accurate alignment, (3) is free from any undue stress imposed
by connecting piping or anchor bolts, and (4) has been operated
under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily.
11000-5
1
1
f
k All costs for this work shall be included in the prices quoted by
equipment suppliers.
1
Manufacturer's representative requirements for equipment furnished
by Owner are outlined in Appendix 1 for each item of equipment,
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with each
manufacturer concerning dates and times for installation of
equipment to insure proper scheduling of representatives visits.
1,14 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
For each type of equipment to be furnished and installed under
this contract, the Contractor shall prepare an operation and
maintenance manual covering:
A. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and
limiting conditions.
B. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking 1
F instructions.
C. Operating instructions for startup, routine and normal
operation, regulation and control, shutdown, and emergency
conditions.
0. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
E. Guide to "troubleshooting".
l
F. Parts lists, and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
G. Outline, cross-section, and assembly drawings; engineering f
data; and wiring diagrams.
i
r H. Test data and performance curves, where applicable. I
The above information, as applicable, shall be provided for the
following equipment:
I
1. Pumps and Motors
2, Valves
3. Hoist
4. Electrical Equipment
5. Aluminum Doors
The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any
I instructions or parts lists packed with or attached to the
equipment when delivered, I
Manuals shall be printed on heavy, first quality paper, 8-1/2 x 11
Inch size with standard 3-hole punching. Drawings and diagrams
+
11000-6
r
shall be reduced to B-112 x 11 inches or 11 x 17 inches. Where
reduction is not practicable, larger drawings shall be folded
separately, and placed in envelopes which are bound into the
manuals. Each envelope shall bear suitable identification on the
outside.
Two preliminary copies of each manual, temporarily bound in heavy !
paper covers bearing suitable identification, shall be submitted
to the Engineer at the time of submittal of the shop drawings. {
After review by the Engineer, four final copies of each operation
and maintenance manual shall be prepared and delivered to the
Engineer not later than 90 days prior to placing the equipment
into operation. The final manuals shall be bound in stiff
artificial black leather, metal hinged binders, equivalent to
Pilgram Self-Expanding Fastlock Binders, 3-post style. Operations
and maintenance manuals for equipment furnished by the Owner will
be provided by the equipment supplier and will not be part of this
contract.
END OF SECTION
j
f
I
,
r
,
11000-7
e
i
11414 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
1.00 GENERAL
,1
1.01 SCOPE
h Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish and install two (2)
totally submersible non-clog sewage pumps on a slide away coupling
system located in the wet well completely as shown on the Plans and
specified herein. The pumps shall be capable of pumping raw,
unscreened wastewater.
The Contractor shall also install base plates, piping, coupling
system etc. for a third identical pump such that an additional pump
could be made operational by making electrical connections and
f lowering the pump into place on the slide away coupling system. j
Piping shall be complete except for the discharge valves.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete shop
drawings including wiring diagrams in accordance with Section
01001, Paragraph 1.27, SHOP DRAWINGS. Shop drawings shall include a
complete description of all equipment offered including control and
mounting system. Shop drawings shall include catalogs, cuts and
all pertinent engineering data required to fully evaluate the
equipment. Characteristic curves shall be submitted with the
shop drawings showing the capacity, head, efficiency, and brake
horsepower throughout the full operating range of the pump.
Complete specifications on the control equipment including a list
of optional features shall be submitted with the shop drawings.
Submittal data shall be in such form and so presented that the
Engineer may readily review the data.
The Equipment Manufacturer shall submit with the shop drawings a
list of ten (10) similar installations which have been in satis-
factory operation for at least five years. Shop drawings not
including this required information will not be accepted.
Data sheets supplying the following information for the pumping
units shall be submitted with the shop drawings.
PUMP
1. Make and type of pump RPM
2. Speed
3. Horsepower at rated head HP
11414-1
1
1
I
Motor
5. Brake horsepower of motor HP
6. Locked Rotor Current at full voltage Amps
7. Full load current
` B. NEMA Designations
` 9. Locked Rotor Current at full voltage
1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted to the Owner in
accordance with Section 11000, Paragraph 1,14, OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUALS, prior to final acceptance of the equipment.
I
2.00 PRODUCTS j
2.01 PUMPING CONDITIONS i '
1 ! Number of Units 2
Rated Capacity 3000 GPM
Rated Head, TDH 110 Ft.
Maximum Speed 1776 RPM t
2.02 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish and install two (2) F1ygt Model CP3230
or approved equal, submersible sewage pumps, complete with motors,
' and accessories to make a fully automatic system. The motor shall be
120 HP, 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 cycle. The Control System shalt be as
specified in Section 16000, ELECTRICAL.
i
s
2.03 PUMP DESIGN
Each pump, motor, and cable assembly shall be furnished in one
integral unit, factory assembled by the pump manufacturer.
The pump design shall be such that the pumping unit will be auto-
matically and firmly connected to the discharge piping when lowered
into place on its mating discharge connection. Sealing of the
pumping unit to the discharge connection elbow shall be accom-
plished by a simple Linear downward motion of the pump. The dis-
charge connection shall be permanently installed in the wet well. I
The pump shall be easily removable for inspection or service,
requiring no bolts, nuts or other fastenings to be disconnv ted.
Connection and disconnection of the pumping unit from the discharge
piping shall not require personnel to enter the wet well.
i
Each pump shall be fitted with a stainless steel chain of adequate
strength and length to permit raising and lowering the pump for
inspection or removal.
,j
11414-2
i
1I 1
I
{
1 The pump assembly shall also he capable of running dry or par-
tially submerged for extended periods without any damage to the ,
pump, motor, seals, or accessories.
2.04 PUMP CONSTRUCTION
}
Major pump components such as the stator, casing, oil casing, volute,
impeller and base coupling, shall be of gray cast iron, Class 30,
with smooth surfaces devoid of blow holes and other irregularities.
I Where watertight sealing is required, 0-rings made of nitrile rubber
shall be used. All exposed nuts and bolts shall be of stainless
steel 304. All surfaces coming into contact with sewage, other than
stainless steel, shall be protected by an approved sewage resistant
coating.
All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be
machined and fitted with nitrile rubber 0-rings, Fitting shall be
such that sealing is accomplished by metal-to-metal contact between
machined surfaces. This will result in controlled compression of
nitrile rubber 0-rings without requirement of a specified torque
limit. No secondary sealing compounds, rectangular gaskets,
ellipr.;cal 0-rings, grease or other devices shall be used.
The cable entry water seal design shall preclude specific torque
requirements to insure a watertight and submersible seal. The cable
entry shall be comprised of a single cylindrical elastomer grommet,
flanked by washers, all having a close tolerance fit against the
cable outside diameter and the entry inside diameter and compressed
by the entry body containing a strain relief function, separate from I
the function of sealing the cable. The assembly shall bear against a
shoulder in the pump top. The cable entry junction chamber and motor
shall be separated by a stator lead sealing gland or terminal board,
which shall isolate the motor interior from foreign material gaining
f excess through the pump top. Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary
sealing systems shall not be considered acceptable.
The junction chamber, containing the terminal board, shall be sealed
j from the motor by elastometer compression seal (0-ring). Connection
!1 between the cable conductors and stator leads shall be made with
threaded compressed type binding post permanently affixed to a
terminal board and thus perfectly leak proof.
i Each unit shall be provided with an adequately designed cooling
system, consisting of a water jacket which encircles the stator
housing. The water jacket shall be provided with a separate
circulation of the pump liquid. Cooling media channels and ports
shall be non-clogging by virtue of their dimensions.
Provision for external cooling and flushing shall also be provided.
11414-3
j
i
ar.~
Thermal sensors shall be used to monitor stator temperatures. The
stator shall be equipped with three (3) thermal switches, embedded in
the end coils of the stator winding (one switch in each stator
phase). These shall be used in conjunction with and supplemental to i
3 external motor over protection and wired to the control panel.
The pump shaft shall be of carbon steel 01034 and shall be completely
isolated from the pumped liquid.
Each pump shall be provided with a tandem mechanical rotating shaft ,
seal system. Seals shall run in an oil reservoir. Lapped seal faces
must be hydrodynamically lubricated at a constant rate. The lower
k seal unit, between the pump and oil chamber, shall contain one
stationary and one positively driven rotating tungsten carbide ring.
The upper seal unit, between the oil sump and motor housing, shall
contain one stationary tungsten-carbide ring and one positively
driven rotating carbon ring. Each interface shall be held in contact
by its own spring system. The seals shall require neither mainte.,
nance nor adjustment, but shall be easily inspected and replaceable.
The following seal types shall not be considered acceptable nor
equal to the ua n e en en sea specified. a seals w out
pos t ve y driven rotating mem ers, or conventional double mechanical
seals containing either a common single or double spring acting
between the upper and lower units. This conventional system requires
a pressure differential to offset external pressure and to effect
sealing.
Each seal shall be provided with an oil chamber for the shaft sealing
system. The oil chamber shall house a pressure equalizer ring filled
j with air for oil pressure compensation. Seal lubrication shall
require an oil chamber capacity no greater than 2.6 gals. (10
liters). The drain and inspection plug, with positive anti-leak
seal, shall be easily accessible from the outside.
+ The pump shaft shall rotate on two (2) permanently lubricated
bearings. The upper bearing and the lower bearing a two row angular
contact ball bearing.
`i The impeller shall be of gray cast iron, Class 30, dynamically
balanced, double shrouded non-clogging design havinn long trulet
without acute turns. The impeller shall be capable of handling
solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge and other matter found in
normal sewage applications. The impeller shall be of a two vane
design. The pump manufacturer shall, upon request, furnish mass
moment of inertia data for the proposed impeller. The impeller shall
be capable of passing a minimum 3 inch solid sphere. The fit between
the impeller and the shaft shall be a sliding fit with one key.
The volute shall be of single piece design and shall have smooth
fluid passages large enough at all points to pass any size solid
which can pass through the impeller.
11414-4
_ rte. ~ ~ . • T
y
A wear ring system shall be installed to provide efficient sealing
between the volute and impeller. The wear ring shall consist of a
stationary ring made of nitrite rubber molded with a steel ring /
insert which is drive fitted to the volute inlet and rotating
stainless steel ANSI 304 ring which is drive-Fitted to the impeller
eye.
The pump motor cable, installed, shall be suitable for submersible
pump application with ?122-MSHA approval and this shall be indicated
by a code or legend permanently embossed on the cable. Cable sizing
shall conform to NEC specifications for pump motors.
F„
2.05 MOTOR
be
The motor shresistantaClass fille, tTighhetmotorcasinghaland
shall have moisture
NEMA Design B and designed for continuous duty in a submerged ~
environment. The motor shall be capable of operating in dry or
partially submerged conditions for extended periods without damage.
The namep >.te motor service factors hall be at shl be 460 alleast 1,1 vol~he3motor
shaft shat; tie ainless steel. The phasei71715 cy,le. The motors hall wnot be le- sbthan 120lHPfor
operation more
than ion in RPM it fuAt the ds design point, the motor shall not draw more
than 156 156 A at nominal voltage at utility supply quality.
The electrical cable entranceway to the motor shall be provided
with positive strain relief to prevent leakage orpull outt f the
cable in the event that a force is accidentally placed
cable during the lowering of the pump. One spare set of cable
k seal accessories shall be provided.
the spliced In
All incoming lead wires shall
housing. After splicing,
with epoxy to seal the outer cable packet and the individual
strands to prevent all possibility of water entering the motor
r housing or the terminal housing. A secondary elastomer com-
pression grommet shall also be supplied. The combination of the
epoxy seal and compression grommet shall provide complete sealing
4 and strain relief. Sufficient cable shall be supplied to extend
from the motors to the pump control without splicing.
{ The motor, cable, and electrical controls shall be sized, fur-
Wished, and installed so that the motor shall never exceed the
nameplate rating at any paint on the pumping curve. i
x 2.06 SLIDING COUPLING SYSTEM
F A sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of the pumping
Un I t. The volute casing shall automatically and firmly connect a with machined discharge hconnection, to
f i
a
1 ' ^ y auto Y
I
11414-5
;I
1
which when bolted to the floor of the sump and discharge line,
will receive the pump ischare
Or n similar f devices. ithout the need
fasteners, clamps connecting
of adjustment,
The pump sliding coupling system shall be designed so that the
downward force of the machined mating flanges shall shear away rags,
hair, or other debris that would prevent a uniform water-tight seal.
The entire weight of the pump unit shall be guided by no less than
two guide bars and pressed tightly against the discharge connection
slide irectl
elbow. No portiun of the The pump unit shall ear
of the wet well. .
be stainless steel.
The slide rails shall be stainless steel designed to resist
corrosion in wastewater applications, Any joints in the rails shall
be reinforced from within if pipe is utilized, continuously
full-depth welded, ground smooth, a-1 i uated to resist corrosion,
If steel pipe is utilized it shall oe minimum Schedule 401
The rail support system at the top of the wet-well shall be I
furnished bythepump manufacturer. The support system shall be
door assembly.
integral t t access
' 2.07 ACCESS FRAME AND GUIDES
The Contractor shall also furnish and install a steel access
frame, complete with hinged and hasp-equipped cover, twFrameeshall
guide holders and chain holders and one cable holder.
be securely cast in the concrete slab above the pumps. Each door
shall be torsion bar loaded for ease of 1DOOrsgtand shall have
safety locking handle in open position) i
plate or aluminum. Door will include provisions for padlocking of
13 doors in the closed position to prevent unauthorized entry to the wet
well or valve vault.
2.08 CONTROLS 1
Controls will be supplied in accordance with Section 16150 and the
plans and specifications. t
2.09 PRESSURE GAUGES 1
Pressure gauges shall be required at various locations for use in
testing and operation of the facilities. The gauges and pressure
gauges are to be located as follows;
One on each side of pump discharge valves,
i
Pressure valves to be Marsh Instrument Company , 3-1/2" dial, plain
case, plain movement type, "J1 Series, 1/4threads for connecting.
11414-6
1
Pressure gauges shall be attached to pertinent piping that has been
ded 1/4" , cocks similar mandZequal~to Crane No, 252 galvanize steel
tapped and hre&
PP nipples,
head,
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
The services of the manufacturer's representative shall be +
of i the i equipment, to assure proper
start-up "period
provided for installation and whatever
3.02 ACCEPTANCE TEST
The pump manufacturer shall perform the following inspections and
tests on each pump before shipment from factory:
the electrical custoner's connections purchase order first be
a1 ecked Imller, compliance to and
ch
b) A motor and cable insulation test for moisture content or
insulation defects shall be made. '
C) Prior to submergence, the pump shall be run dry to establish
correct rotation and mechanical integrity.
L ~
F d) The pump shall be run for 30 minutes submerged, a minimum of six
(6) ft. under water.
e) After operation test d), the insulation test b) is to be i
performed again.
A written report stating the foregoing steps have been done shall be
supplied with each pump at the time of shipment.
The pump cable end will be sealed with a high quality protective
covering to make it impervious to moisture or water seepage prior to
electrical installation.
Upon completion of installation of the equipment, an acceptance
test to verify the satisfactory operation of each unit shall be j
conducted. The test shall be conducted in a manner approved by
and in the presence of the Engineer. The units all be c heckeetc.
for excessive noise, vibration, alignment, general operati, i
The unit must perform in a manner acceptable to the Engineer
before final acceptance will be made by the Owner. i
• ~ 3,03 PUMP WARRANTY
1 s
The pump manufacturer shall warrant the units being supplied to the
a
11414-7
1
,
ti
1
owner against defects in workmanship and material for a period of
five (5) years or 10,000 hours under the Municipal Wastewater-
Permanent Installation Warranty Police or one year u- nder the
nndustriaT-Permanen nsta a o~n Terranty Pol icy, under normal use,
opera-fit on and service.-Tile--warran y s a e 1ri pr inCed form and
apply to all similar units,
3,04 EXPERIENCE CLAUSE J
1
The pump manufacturer shall have similar type pumps, installed and
t operating for no less than five (5) years in the United States,
END OF ITEM
i
i j
'j
11414-8
1
LP .
p
\1I
R
7p 14350 HOISTS
1.01 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
l the Contractor shall furnish and install one (1) 2-ton Hoist for
1 removal of the pumps and motors complete and ready for operation as
shown on the Plans and specified herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete shop
drawings including wiring diagrams in accordance with Section 01001,
Paragraph 1.27, SHOP DRAWINGS. Shop Drawings shall include a
complete description of all equipment offered, including catalogs,
cuts, and all pertinent engineering data required to fully evaluate
i the equipment. Submittal data shall be in such form and so presented r
that the Engineer may readily review the data,
1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Four (4) sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be
submitted to the Owner prior to final acceptance of the equipment
in accordance with Section 11000, Paragraph 1.14, OPERATIONS AND
MAINTENANCE MANUALS.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 HOISTS
The hoist shall be electrically operated Catalog Number 110113-20M,
as manufactured by Dresser Industries "Shaw Box' or approved equal.
Y Hoist shall have a maximum lift of 40 feet with a lift speed of 24
feet per minute and a motorized trolley with a speed of 100 feet per
minute. The hoist shall have a thermal protector to prevent motor
burnout, and a free wheeling spring clutch that eliminates backlash.
I Safety features shall include weight type upper limit switch, low
voltage control circuit, full magnetic controls, automatic load brake
and magnetic disc type motor brake, The all steel rope drum shall be
"ully scored for the entire lift without overwind. Hoist shall be
for 460V, 3-phase, 60 hertz power with NEMA enclosures suitable for
outside operation. Hoist is to be furnished with a weatherproof
pushbutton station suspended. Furnish and install a 40 foot
weatherproof electric cord reel for outside mounting,
14350-1
1
i
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING
Hoist shall be factory tested before shipment with a load 25% greater ~
than rated capacity. Upon completion of installation of the equip-
ment, an acceptance test to verify the satisfactory operation of the
unit shall be conducted. The test shall be conducted in a manner
approved by and in the presence of the Engineer. The unit shall be
checked for general operation. The unit must perform in a manner
acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by
the Owner.
A 1 , ,
' END OF SECTION
1 ~
1
f
J
i
t
ff~
1 14350-2
' r
I
i
f
• II
X
15062 CAST IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
1.00 GENERAL
The contractor shall furnish and install all cast
teiron p ipeit d
ancesr
,
fittings, including taps, connections, and app
in trenches or supported completely as shown on the Plans and
specified herein.
f
" The Contractor shall submit six {6} sets of full and complete shop
drawings on the cast iron pipe in accordance with Section 01001,
} PARAGRAPH 1.27, SHOP DRAWINGS, All of the drawings and data shall be
complete and shall include a complete description of the pipe
offered, including all pertinent engineering data required for a
complete evaluation of the submittal. Submittal data shall be in
such form and so presented that the Engineer may readily review the
data .
2.00 PRODUCTS
ti
All cast iron pipe shall be cast from Ductile Iron in accordance
with ANSI Specification A21.51 (AWWA C-151). Pipe shall have
push-on Joints in accordance with ANSI Specification A21.11 (AWWA
C-111) and shall be similar to U.S. Tyton , American Fastite or
Clow "Bell-Tite", or shall be flanged as shown on the Plans. ANSI
Outside coating shall be Standard Bituminous Outside Coating,
A21.4, "Standard Thickness Lining". A bituminous seal coat shall
be applied over the mortar lining.
All ductile iron pipe 6 inches in diameter and larger shall be a
minimum of Thickness Class 50, and shall be designed for 250 psi
in accordance with ANSI Standard A21,60 (AWWA C-150) for laying
Condition "2" and with twelve (12') feet of cover. Pipe smaller
than 6 inches in diameter shall be Class 51, f
Fittings shall have push-on Joints unless otherwise indicated in
accordance with ANSI Standard A21.11 (AWWA C-111),
Fittings for pipe, 12 inches in diameter and smaller shall be
Class 250 gray iron castings, and fittings for pipe larger than 12
inches in diameter shall be Class 150 ductile iron castings, all
conforming to ANSI Standard A21.10 (AWWA C-110). Coating for
fittings shall be as specified above for cast iron pipe.
3.00 EXECUTION
3,01 INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL
i
All cast iron pipe, fittings, specials, valves, and hydrants
shall be installed in accordance with the Plans and these
Specifications,
15062.1
i
1
Unless otherwise indicated, pipe in trenches shall be laid to
the grade shown or an even grade from point to point for
which elevations are furnished, '
Trenching and Dackfilling shall be in accordance witkt Section
02201, EARTHWORK.
Trench bottom shall be excavated below the pipe grade for
installation of pipe bedding as shown on the Plans, Pipe
shall be laid on the bedding such that it Is supported
uniformly for its full length.
D. PIPE HANDLING
All pipe, fittings, and special castings shall be lowered
into trench by crane or other suitable method and shall not
be rolled in or "dumped" into the trench. Pipe, fittings
shall be handled in such a manner as not to damage the
coating. All dirt and trash that may be in the barrel of the
pipe, on the spigot or in the bell shall be removed while the
pipe is suspended. All pipe and fittings shall be handled
with slings, The use of hooks for handling pipe will not be
permitted,
The pipe is to be kept clean during the laying operation and
11 free of all sticks, dirt, and trash and at the close of each
operating day the open end of the pipe shall be effectively
sealed against the entrance of water or obstructions. {
C. JOINT MAKING
1, Jointing Mechanical Joint Pipe: This type of pipe shall
be Jointed in full accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and shall be done in a neat and workman-
like manner. Care shall be taken to prevent shearing
the bolts,
f After carefully cleaning both spigot and bell and after
W slipping the follower ring and the gasket over the
spigot end, the spigot shall be slipped into the bell,
if necessary to get satisfactory installation, a
lubricant shall be applied to the spigot to assist in
assembly.
;I
The gaskets shall be carefully seated by hand so as to
E be even in the bell at all points,
After drawing up the follower ring to uniform bearing '
M against the gasket, the bolts are to be inserted and
tightened by hand in pairs using bolts opposite each
other.
r j
16062-2
The nuts are to be tightened amply to hold the required
pressure. Extension wrenches, or pipes over wrench
handles, will not ,e permitted. Ten (10") inch ratchet
wrenches shall be t..ed to tighten the nuts, unless other
II type wrenches are ar roved by the Engineer.
The finished ,joint shall he neat and uniform and shall
be watertight.
2. Making Flanged Joints: Flanged pipe shall be erected in
accordance with the controlling dimension shown on the
Plans. Each piece of flanged pipe shall be thoroughly
cleaned to remove dirt, rust, grease, and other foreign
matter, and flanged faces shall be thoroughly wire
brushed to insure even hearing for gaskets and mating
flanges. Flange gaskets shall be 1/16" full faced,
fabric reinforced rubber gaskets. Flange bolts shall be
tightened, each in turn, at a uniform rate around the
,joint. Finished Joint shall be watertight.
3. Making Push-On Joints: The Jointing of this type of
joint shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. The ~
procedure for Jointing shall be generally as follows:
The spigot and bell shall be thoroughly cleaned and
dried before starting the assembly of the ,joint. The
gasket shall be wiped clean with a cloth.
The gasket shall be placed irto the gasket seat in the
y bell.
A thin film of lubricant shall be applied to the surfaee ,
of the gasket that will come in contact with the
entering pipe spigot. If necessary, lubricant shalt
also be applied to the spigot.
The Joint shall be made by exerting sufficiont force on
the entering pipe so that its plain end will move past
the gasket. This exerting force may be of a crowbar, or
fork-tool for 8" and smaller or by use of a Jack on 10"
or larger pipe.
D. BLOCKING
Concrete blocking in accordance with Section 02201,
EARTHWORK, shall be placed at bends, tees, crosses, and
plugs, in buried lines. The concrete blocking shall be
ij places so as to rest against firm undisturbed trench walls,
normal to the thrust. The supporting area for each block
shall be sufficient to withstand the thrust which may develop
at the pipe design pressure. Each block shall rest on a
firm, undisturbed foundation or trench bottom.
15062-3
1
r
3,02 HYDROSTATIC TEST
' A. GENERAL
After the pipe has been laid and backfilled, each section of
newly laid pipe shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure
test, For any section being tested, the pressure applied
shall be such that at the lowest point in the section, the
pressure shall be equal to the design pressure of the pipe or
as indicated on the Plans.
Each section of pipe shall be slowly filled with water and
the specified test pressure, measured to the point of lowest
elevation, shall be supplied by means of a pump connected to
f the pipe in a satisfactory manner. The pump, pipe connec-
tion, and all necessary apparatus including gauges and meters
shall be furnished by the Contractor.
B, PROCEDURE
The Contractor may test the pipeline in sections when all the
pipe in the section has been laid and all concrete blocking
is at least 28 days old. The test shall be made against
valves when available, or by placing temporary plugs or
bulkheads in the pipe, and filling the line slowly with
water. Care shall he used to see that all air vents are open
during the filling. After the line, or section thereof has
been completely filled, it shall be allowed to stand under a
slight pressure at least 48 hours to allow the lining to
absorb what water it will and to allow the escape of air from
any air pockets. During this period, the bulkheads, valves,
manholes, and connections shall be examined for leaks. If
any are found, these shall be stopped or, in the case of
valves in the main line or bulkheads, provision shall be made
for measuring the leakage during the test, The water neces-
sary to maintain the test pressure shall be measured through
a meter or by other means satisfactory to the Engineer,
Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment and make
tests at his expense.
Before applying the specified test pressurQ, all air shall be
expelled from the pipe, In the event it is necessary to
expel air from high points other than where taps are pro-
vided, the Contractor may tap the line for this purpose and
afterward tightly plug the tap. No extra compensation will
be made for these taps. Duration of test shall be four (4)
hours,
C, EXAMINATION UNDER PRESSURE
During the last two hours of the test, the entire route of
the pipeline shall be inspected to locate any leaks or
breaks. Any defective ,points, cracked or defective pipe,
15062-4
fittings, or valves discovered in consequence of this pros-
sure test shall be removed and replaced with sound material
in the manner provided and the test shall be repeated until ;
satisfactory results are obtained.
Any and all noticeable leaks shall be repaired regardless of
whether the actual leakage is within the allowable.
D, PERMISSIBIX LEAKAGE
Maximum permissible leakage shall be 23.3 gallons per 24
hours, per mile of pipe, per inch of nominal diameter, based
on 18 foot Joint lengths and 150 psi pressure or as specified
in AWWA C600 Standard,
Leakage is defined as the quantity of water to be supplied
into the newly laid pipe, or any valved section of it,
necessary to maintain the specified leakage test pressure i
after the pipe has been filled with water and the air ex-
polled.
Should any test of pipe laid disclose leakage greater than
that specified, the Contractor shall at his own expense,
locate and repair the dofective Joints, until the leakage is
within the specified allowance.
END OF SECTION E
I
i
i
J~
i
15062-5 {
l ~
t
rt .
s~ 15100 ECCENTRIC VALVES
1.00 GENERAL
f The Contractor shall furnish and install valves completely as
shown on the Plans and specified herein. Six (6) sets of full and
complete shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with
IA Section 01001, Paragraph 1.27, SHOP DRAWINGS shall contain a
I? complete description of the valves offered, Including catalogues,
I cuts, and all pertinent engineering data required for a complete
evaluation of the submittal. The valves shall not differ from the
i basic requirements specified herein. Valves differing from minor
specified requirements may be accepted provided each point of
difference is clearly stated in the shop drawings. This require-
ment is set forth to facilitate review of the shop drawings and is
r` not to be construed as waiving any of the specified requirements.
es Submittal data shall be in such form and so presented that the
' Engineer may readily review the data. The valve raanufacturer
shall submit a list of at least ten (10) similar installations
which have been in satisfactory condition for at least three (3)
' years,
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES 1
Eccentric valves shall be of the non-lubricated quarter-turn type
with resilient faced plugs or seats and shall be furnished with
flanged end connections unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
Flanges shall be Class 125 and shall conform to ANSI standard for
?E cast-iron flanges. Valves shall have a minimum nominal port area
of 80% of the pipe. All exposed nuts, bolts, springs, washers,
etc. shall be Type 316 Stainless Steel. Resilient plug facings or
seats shall be of nitrile rubber, BUNA-N, or equal and shall be
suitable for use with clarifier sludge.
Valves shall be supplied with a handwheel. Valves shall have seals
on all shafts and gaskets on the valve covers to prevent the entry of
water.
All valves shall be DeZurik (Figure 118), Dresser (Style 820), or
approved equal.
s
a 2,02 GATE VALVES
i
The Contractor shall furnish and install all gate valves and
appurtenances, including valve boxes, operators, bolts, nuts and
gaskets completely as shorn on the Plans and specified herein.
Unless otherwise specified, all gate valves greater than 3" in size
shall be in strict accordance with American Water Works Association
rr
' 15100-1
I'
Standard Specification C500-71, "Gate Valves for Water and Other
Liquids". "
Gate valves shall be double disc, parallel seat internal wedging type
with ASTM A126 Class B cast iron body, and Grade I ASTM B62 bronze
mountings. All gate valves shall be non-rising stem and shall turn
counterclockwise to open. Valves for buried service shall have a 2"
square nut operator and shall be installed with extension stems where
~ required to extend operating nut to within 12 of the finished
grade.
Flanges for valves shall be drilled to match connecting flanges. All
flanges shall conform to the Standard Specification of the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI). Flanges shall be Class 125.
Bell ends for valves shall be mechanical joints, or rubber gaskets
push-on joints for concrete cylinder pipe spigots or cast iron pipe.
Valves for buried service shall be supplied with cast iron valve
boxes. The valve box shall be firmly supported and maintained
centered and plumb over, the wrench nut of the gate valve, with box
cover flush with the surface of the ground. Valve boxes shall be of
the three piece cast iron extension type, Mueller 10380 or Clow
F2464, with No. 6 round base. The three pieces sha11 consist of the
I top section, center section, and base lus the cover. Raised
letters in the cover shall read "SEWER'.
2,03 CHECK VALVES
Check valves shall be of the swing type, constructed of heavy cast
iron with a bronze or stainless steel seat ring with continuous shaft
for attachment or an outside weight and lever. The valve shall pre-
vent the return of water back through the valve or pump shut-off and
shall be tight closing, with renewable seat ring The valve disc
shall be cast iron or cast steel suspended from the shaft which shall I
pass through a stuffing box and be connected to the lever on the
outside of the valve. The check valves shall be List 114 Swing Check
r I Valvos, Model F-5345, as manufactured by Clow Corporation,
Bensenville, Illinois, Mueller Model A-2600-6-01, or approved equal.
3,00 EXECUTION
Buried valves shall be carefully handled and lodered into position in
such manner as to prevent damage to any part of the valves. The
valve shall be placed in proper position with stem truly vertical or
horizontal as the case may be, and shall be securely held until all
connections have been made, The Contractor shall furnish all bolts
and gaskets for flange connections, The Contractor shall be
responsible for adjusting the valve boxes to the proper length to
conform with the ground surface,
END OF SECTION
i
15100-2
{
16000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.00 GENERAL
i 1.01 SCOPE
The electrical work shall consist of providing complete and
operative electrical installations as shown on the Plans and
provided for in these Specifications, as well as that necessary to
V interface with and operate all plant equipment. The work includes
the furnishing of all labor, materials, and equipment except that
specifically stated to be furnished by the Owner to provide a
complete and workable electrical system.
' 1.02 DRAWINGS
h
The drawings are not intended to and do not show all equipment
such as junction boxes, outlet boxes, conduit fittings, and
similar. Even i
thoug~ such items of equipment may not be speci-
fically mentioned in these specifications, nor shown on the draw-
ings, nor noted on shop drawings, if they are necessary to make a
complete installation, they shall be included in the work required
under these specifications.
1.03 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT
The drawings show the approximate location of cabinets, panel
k boards, switches, lights, receptacles, and other equipment. The 1
most suitable location shall be determined by actual measurement
during construction. Final location shall be as proposed by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
. ~ i
1.04 AS - CONSTRUCTED DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall maintain a set of Drawings and Shop Drawings
in "As - Constructed" condition. Changes, modifications, or
corrections shall be marked as they occur. The location and
burial depth of underground conduits shall be shown by dimonsion
and scale. The Contractor shall date and sign markings and shall
furnish a complete set to the Engineer upon completion.
1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS
All electrical material, workmanship and tests shall be in
conformity with the applicable current standard rules, regu-
lations, and specifications of the following authorities;
i
1
16000-1
s
5
~ 1
i
A. National Board of Fire Underwriters (NDFU) and National
Electric Code (NEC).
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers W7EE).
D. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA),
E, American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
F. National Electrical Contractors Association W.;
G. Association Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC).
H. National Bureau of Standards (NBS) (National Electrical
Safety Code),
I, Rural Electrification Administration (REA). 1
J. City of Denton, Texas,
All Plectrical work shall be performed under the direct super-
vision of a Master Electrician holding a valid license in the
State of Texas.
1.06 STORAGE AND CLEANUP
All equipment stored on the job prior to installation shall he
suitably housed and protected from weather or other damage in full
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. All equipment
aq,iipped with space heaters shall have the space heaters energized
and operational as soon as possible following installation, Space
heaters shall be kept in operation to protect equipment from moss-
ture, All equipment shall have been properly oiled and lubricated
during storage and bafore any operation and shall be checked by a
manufacturer s representative prior to startup. At the completion of
the work, the Contractor shall leave the storage area in a satis-
factory condition,
1,07 SERVICE
Electrical service to the Lift cfation shall be from the existing
480V, 3•,hase, Powe Company transformer, This Contractor shall
extend the main service conductors to a service pole at elevation and
location as shown on the Plans. Also assist the power company in
making the final connections.
16000-2
t
1,0$ SUBMITTALS
Unless otherwise s i
pacified, the Contractor shall furnish to the
Owner, for his approval, shop drawings showing all equipment he
contemplates incorporating in the work. Samples of materials
shall be submitted for approval when so directed. Equipment,
materials, and articles installed or used without such approval
shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. The shop drawings '
shall include catalogue numbers and complete descriptions.
Approval of such drawings, equipment and specifications shall not
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the satisfactory
performance of the equipment as furnished and installed.
2,00 PRODUCTS
f
2.01 MATERIALS r
A. GENERAL
i All material shall be new unless otherwise specified, All
materials of a type for which the Underwriter Laboratories
have established a standard shall be listed by the Under—
writer's Laboratories, Inc., and shall bear their label,
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
All work shall be performed by competent workmen, skilled in this ,
type of work, Work shall be neat throughout and s
s tru
ound, ct.rall
y
i
i
3.02 TESTING I
All circuits shall be rung out and on completion of the work all
of the installations shall be entirely free of grounds and short
circuits.
3.03 GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall guarantee against mechanical defects in any
or all materials and workmanship covered by these specifications
and shall make good, repair and replace, at his own expense, any
defective work, material, or part which may show itself within a
period of one year after final acceptance of the work.
END OF SECTION
.
16000-3
< < _ T
' 16100 WIRE AND CONDUIT SYSTEM
1,00 GENERAL
1,01 SCOPE
The work covered by this item of the Specification includes
furnishing all labor and material and performing the necessary °
operations to provide a complete wire and conduit system.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. LOW VOLTAGE WIRE (60OV)
All conductors shall be 600 volt thermoplastic insulated
i single conductor copper, 76%, Type THHN/TIIWN for sizes Ne }
' AWG and smaller, Type THW for sizes #6 AWG and larger, wet or
dry. The wire shall be water tank tested and approved as
machine tool wire in accordance with the National Machine
Tool Duilddrs Association, The wire shall be Collyer
Specification No. P-400 for Type THHN/THWN and No. P-142 for
Type THW, Anaconda, or approved equal.
8. RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
All rigid steel galvanized conduit shall be hot-dipped
galvanized inside and out and shall conform in all respects
to Federal Specification WW-C-681d, ASA C80.1 and Under-
writers' Laboratories specifications. The conduit shall be
protected by a chromic acid rinse. Conduit shall be Triangle
PWC, or approved equal.
3.00 INSTALLATION
A
3.01 WIRE
' i
A. GENERAL
All electrical wiring systems shall be color coded in accor-
dance with the National Electrical Code. In conduits or runs
containing from two to seven conductors, no two conductors
shall be of the same color. In conduits or runs containing
from eight to fourteen conductors, the same color shall not
appear mnre than twice. For runs of more than fourteen
conductors, the saine color shall not appear more than three
times Unless necessary for pulling purposes, conductors shall
he continuous from terminal block to terminal block without
16100-1
splice. Under no condition shall conductors of a different
color be sp ce oge er, c rcu s sa1T6e egg-'e-d at
Terminals.
+
All wire and cable d8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. The
minimum size conductors permitted is N12AWG, except as
specifically indicated on the Plans. All wire shall bear the
approval of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
B. LOW VOLTAGE J
All conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no 1
splices shall be made except at outlets. Sufficient wire shall
be left at all outlets to make connections to equipment without
straining.
All splices and taps shall be made with mechanical type,
compression type or spring connectors. Splices and taps shall i
then be reinsulated with Scotch Tape No. 33, half lapped, to a
thickness of 1-1/2 times the conductor and insulations
thickness.
C. GROUNDING a
All conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets, and other equipment
shall be properly grounded in accordance with National Electric
Code requirements. The ground wire shall be bare :,tranded
copper, sized as shown on the Plans. Where ground wire is
exposed to mechanical damage, it shall be installed in thick
wall conduit. Connections shall be made to equipment with
solderless connections. Wire connections to the groundr
conductor shall be of the fused type equal to the Cadweld
{ process.
j The metal surface under the grounding lug shall be cleaned to ~II
r j bright metal. Connections to motors shall be to the ground- 1
ing stud which shall be threaded into the stationary frame and
not an end bell, and the ground wire shall not be lugged to a
mounting bolt. Equipment not specifically shown connected to a ?
grounding conductor shall be grounded by means of a conduit
supplying the equipment. Where direct metallic connections ;
cannot be made, bonding Jumpers shall be used.
l
E Grounding mats shall be constructed and installed as indi-
cated on the Plans.
3,02 CONDUIT
~f
I
A. GENERAL
All conduit buried in earth or, in concrete shall be rigid PVC.
Unless otherwise indicated, all other conduit shall be rigid
{
16100-2
j
steel, At the transition from underground or from concrete,
- PVC conduit shall be protected from mechanical damage by
extending rigid steel conduit a maximum of twelve inches and a
minimum of four inches into earth or concrete at the
transition. Conduit sizes shall be as shown on the Plans,
except that in no case shall a conduit size be less than that
required by the National Electric Code. The minimum size
permitted shall be 3/4 inch. JJ
B. UNDERGROUND
S.l All underground conduits shall be buried a minimum of 18 inches
deep and as shown on the Plans. Buried conduit bank shall be
backfilled with material free from large rock, paving material,
or large angular substance which may damage the conduits,
C. ROUTING AND SUPPORT
Conduits in buildings shall be exposed on unfinished ceilings
and basement areas as shown on the plans, Conduits shall be t
rigidly supported to the building structure by means of straps
or clamps, bolted or screwed to the structure. The straps
shall be of the two-hole pipe strap type and clamps shall be of a
the one-hole pipe strap type.
f
t D. TERMINATIONS
° Double locknut construction shall be used on all conduit
terminating in stamped metal motor terminal, motor starter,
T. safety switch, outlet, junction or pull box, etc,, with
approved type of bushing over end of conduit. Length of
conduit threads shall be increased at outlets, Junction and `
pull boxes where necessary to accomodate double locknuts and
bushings. All bushings shall be fully seated against end of
conduit,
r ~
E. BUSHINGS
Bushings shall be composed of an outer, threaded metal ring with
an inner insulated compound ring molded into the metal ring, or
shall be of the threaded type, composed entirely of an approved
insulating material.
F. NIPPLES i
Conduit nipples shall have two independent sets of threads.
Runninq threads shall not be used, Where conditions require
joining two fixed conduits into a continuous run, a conduit
union shall be used,
16100-3
1
j
G. PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES
tondulet" type fittings shall not be used on conduits con-
taining wire k4 AWG or longer. Pull boxes shall be provided and r
installed where necessary to facilitate the installation of
cable and wires. The pull boxes shall be N.E.C. size. Junc-
tion or pull boxes installed in concrete slabs shall be cast
iron. All other boxes and outlets shall be 304 stainless steel '
or cast iron with watertight covers. All pull boxes and i
Junction boxes shall be accessible and not buried.
i
N. EXPANSION JOINTS
Expansion Joints shall be installed in all conduits crossing
concrete expansion ,points. Provisions shall be made to prevent
shear strain at crossings.
END OF SECTION
I
jqql
I 1
i :
a
Y.
f 1
f
j ~
16100-4
i
16150 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
i
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE ,
The Contractor shall make all electrical connections to equipment
I furnished by the Owner and other contracts, and furnish wiring,
conduit, outlet boxes, etc., as required, He shall check the
Plans and Specifications and inform himself as to the amount and
type of such wiring that may be required and include same in his
bid.
1,02 ENCLOSURES
1
Unless otherwise indicated, enclosures shall be NEMA 1 for indoor
installations and NEMA 4X stainless steel for outdoor Installa
3 tions.
2,00 PRODUCTS
2,01 MATERIALS
LIGHTING TRANSFORMERS
Lighting transformers shall be Acme Electric Dry Type, General 1
Electric, or equal. Lighting transformers shall be for operation
on 480 volt primary, 120/240 volt secondary with primary taps 2 - k'
2-1/2% above and 2 - 2-1/2% below normal. In all cases trans-
formers shall be sized as shown on the Plans.
LIGHTING PANELS
Lighting Panel shall be General Electric Type NLAB, Square D NQOB, i
or equal with bolt-on circuit hreakers. All multipole breakers
shall have an internal common trip. All panels shall be of NEMA 1 t; {
construction unless otherwise specified. Panels shall have a I
complete detailed directory. Panel shall be for operation on
120/240 volts, 1-phase, 60 Hertz,
CONTROL RELAYS
Control relays shall be industrial type, 600 volt, with contacts
rated 10 amps at 120 VAC, General Electric CR 120 Lina, Square D
Class 8501, or approved equal.
16150-1
4
i
CONTROL STATIONS, SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS -
Switches, pushbuttons, and control stations shall be heavy duty,
oil tight, General Electric, CR 2940, Square 0 Class 4001, or
approved equal. Where control stations, switches or pushbuttons
are shown to be installed outdoors they shall be housed in a NEMA i
4X enclosure.
INDICATING LIGHTS, SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS
1
Selector switches, pushbuttons, and indicating lights shall be
heavy duty, oil tight General Electric Series CR2940, Westing-
house, or approved equal.
TIMING RELAYS
1 Timing relays where indicated shall have the capability to be hand
set by an external dial. Terminals shall be front mounted and
readily accessible. Ranges shall be as shown on the Plans. The
timing relays shall have both normally open and normally closed
contacts, Timing relays where shown on the Plans shall be Agastat
7000 Series time delay relay, or equal, for operation on 120 n
V.A.C., 60 hertz,
LEVEL CONTROL BULBS
Level bulbs shall be plastic encased mercury switch type. The
bulbs and cables shall be strapped to plastic, PVC pipe and be
furnished and installed as shown on the Plans. Level bulbs shall
be Flygt ENH-10, Chicago Pump equal. E
LATCHING RELAYS
Where shown on control schematics latching relays shall be dual
coil latching type with coil clearing contacts heremtically
sealed, plug-in type, 120 VAC with 4 Form C contacts rated 10
E 1 amperes, Patter and Brumfield Model KBP 17 AG, Clare (equal 7
model), or approved equal,
LEVEL CONTROL AND PUMP ALTERNATOR
I
This unit shall contain level control relays, a high alarm relay, and j
I an automatic pump alternator mounted on a common backplate suitable
for mounting in a Motor Control Center. The unit shall be designed
for three-pump, a pump down operation to start pumps one at a time on
` rising level and stop pumps simultaneously on falling level, and
f provide a separate high level alarm. Alternation shall occur after
each pumping cycle is completed, Outputs from the unit shall be an
isolated contact for each of the three pumps. The unit shall operate 1
on 120 VAC and shall be designed for operation with level control
bulbs suspended in the wet well as shown on the Plans. The unit I
shall be similar to BW Controls Model 8040-AD31-1100 with additions i
and modifications as described herein, or approved equal. I
f
16150-2
3W T
3,00 INSTALLATION
3,01 GENERAL j
The Contractor shall make all electrical connections to
as specified, Installation shall be made in equipment
compliance with manu-
facturer's recommendations and the Contract D, If none are l
available frog the manufact rawings
urer of the specific equipment or shown
on the Contract Drawings, Installation shall be according to the
best electrical Industry and trade practice,
3,02 TEST I
3
Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shpalr l perform f
continuity tests and functional checkout to assure proe opera-
tion of all equipment,
f
END OF SECTION
J '
1
j
i
R
r
f
i
16150-3
ti; 113,.1 -,4t4 .*.21,`tr,. hl ,Y. q:; 1• f.. . 1'
T
' r
l
I
S~
16181 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE 1
The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall
consist of the furnishings of the equipment as described herein
and shown on the uttached drawings, Ail primary parts of the
equipment, including the contactors, instrument transformers,
I
busses, connections and insulators, shall be coordinated
to
withstand mechanical stress and to have sufficient thermal
capacity for use on the proposed system without artificial
cooling.
1.02 STANDARDS
The equipment shall comply with the latest rules and regulations
of the n
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer's Association, andethe,American
National Standards Institute,
' 1.03 MANUFACTURER
s
The equipment shall be General Electric 8000-Line, or approved
equal.
1,04 OPERATING VOLTAGE
The equipment shall be deshpied and arranged for operation on 480
volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz,
r
1.05 CONTROL POWER j`
Control power shall be 120 VAC from control transformers located
in each starter.
1,06 MOTOR CONTROL HORSEPOWER RATING
Horsepowers as indicated on the Plans are approximate, It shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish properly sized
motor control equipment when actual motor horsepowers are deter-
mined. If actual motor horsepowers differ from the Plans the
Contractor shall obtain assistance from the Engineer in deter-
mining whether or not hardware and wiring changes are necessary,
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all components
and wire of the proper size at no additional cost.
16181-1
,
1,07 ENCLOSURES
A. OUTDOOR
The equipment shall be installed in NEMA 3R enclosures with
gasketed doors.
2,00 PRODUCTS
2,01 STRUCTURE UNITS
Motor control centers shall consist of vertical sections bolted
together to form a rigid, free standing assembly and shall be
designed to permit future additions, changes of regrouping of
units by the purchaser. Structural steel base channels and
lifting angles shall be provided. Each section shall be approxi-
mately 90" high excluding lifting angles and base channels. Depth
f of units shall be 20 inches.
Horizontal and vertical bus bars shall be braced for 22,000 rms
symmetrical amperes. Main horizontal bus bars sized as shown on
the Plans, but not less than 600 amperes, shall be provided near
the top of the control center and extend its entire length.
Vertical bus bars shall be rated not less than 300 amperes.
Busses shall be aluminum or copper. Insulated horizontal and
vertical bus carriers shall be furnished to reduce the hazard of
accidental contact, Small, separate openings in the barriers
shall permit unit stab-in contacts to pass through and engage the
vertical bus bars. Bottom bus covers shall be provided below the
vertical bus to protect the bus from fish tapes or other items
entering the bottom of the motor control center. A ground bus
shall run the entire length of the motor control center. ;
Pullbox compartments for horizontal wiring shall be provided at i
the top and bottom of the control center. Incoming-line compart-
ment shall be front accessible but isolated from the main bus and
other compartments. A vertical wiring compartment with separate
hinged front door shall be provided in each controller section,
2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKER AND LIKE STARTER UNITS
Starter units Sizes 1 and 2 and molded case and branch breaknrs
through 225 ampere frame shall be completely drawout so that units
ma,,~ be withdrawn without disconnecting any wiring. Starter units
sizes 3 and 4 shall be drawout type after disconnecting power
leads only. Units three space units high and over shall be
bolt-in type, A positive guidance system shall be provided to assure
proper alignment of wedge-shaped power stabs in dead-front
openings in vertical power bus. The screw racking mechanism shall
serve as a mechanical advantage to the operator during unit
insertion or removal, Stab-in power terminals shall be of a type
that will increase contact preasure on short circuits. `
I
16181••2
Each unit compartment shall be provided with an individual front
door. Starters and feeder-unit doors shall be interlocked
mechanically with the unit disconnect divide to present unin-
tentional opening of the door while energized and unintentional
application of power while door is open. Means shall be provided
for releasing the interlock for intentional access to the interior
` at any time and intentional application of power, if desired,
while door is open. Padlocking arrangements shall permit locking
the disconnect device OFF with at least three padlocks with door
closed or open. Unit disconnect operating handle shall he mounted
on the disconnect, not on the unit door, and shall indicate ON and
OFF with door open or closed. Means shall be provided for
padlocking the unit in the partially withdrawn position. Overload
relays shall be reset from outside the enclosure by means of an
insulated bar or button.
Line starters shall be circuit breaker combination magnetic type.
Unless otherwise indicated, starters shall be for full voltage
starting. Starters shall be for operation on 480 V., 3 phase,
60 Hertz. All devices shown on the schematic and not specifically
designated as being elsewhere shall be installed, with the cores-
ponding starter, in the motor control center. All controls a,id
1Ights shall be heavy duty oil tight construction. All devices
` installed in the starter or on the door of the starter, shall be
completely factory wired with connections to external devices i
brought to a terminal strip installed in the starter. Power cable I
in the starter shall be color-coded in a distinctive color to
distinguish them from control cables. No field wiring shall be
permitted except for connections to remote devices from the
terminal strip. A physical wiring diagram shall be provided on
each enclosure door and shall be protected since it is to remain
intact and legible for the service life of the equipment. All
11 control devices shall be identified as to type and manufacturer.
Control accessories shall be as further specified in this section
of the specifications.
k
Control relays, timing relays, control transformers, control
circuit fuse )',,cks, et.,;., shall be grouped in the corresponding
s~arter with c.mtrol wiring kept as short as possible. Ample
~
space snail be allowed between devices so that each component is
completely assessable without removing any other device.
The circuit breakers shall be manually operated, trip-free from
the handle, and magnetic trip. The operating handle shall lsarly
indicate whether the breaker is ON or OFF , or "TRIPPED".
Means shall be provided to lock each circuit breaker handle in the
"OFF" position and to close the cover. All feeder breakers and
breaker starter combinations shall have a minimum interrupting
rating of 22,000 amperes rms.
16181-3
i
' y
I ' 1
3 Each circuit breaker or line starter shall be provided with an
individual terminal board, completely accessible from the front.
The control wiring shall be NEMA Type IIB. Where control trans-
formers are indicated and unless shown otherwise, each starter
I shall contain a 480 to 120 volt fused control transformer with
sufficient capacity for all the devices shown in the schematic, /
Also where indicated, the starter shall have three external
manual-reset thermal overload relays, Overload relays shall be
selected to trip at 125% of the motor nameplate full-load current
rating.
Lighting panels and transformers located in motor control center
shall be of the type as specified in the Electrical Equipment
Section.
A control center identification number nameplate shall be fastened
on the vertical wire through door of every section. Each control
center unit shall have its own identification number nameplate
fastened to the unit saddle. Each control center unit shall also
have an engraved bakelite nameplate fastened to the outside of the ,
unit door. Wiring diagrams shall be provided on each cubicle door
and shall be protected such that they shall remain attached and
legible for the service life of the equipment.
2.03 INCOMING LINE UNIT
The Motor Control Centers shall be arranged for top or bottom
entry as indicated on the Plans. Lugs sized as required for the
Motor Control Center Service shall be provided in a compartment
within the Incoming Line Unit.
Surge capacitors, lightning arrestors, and under voltage and phase
sequence relays with associated pot+antial transformers, shall be
installed within the incoming line unit as indicated on the Plans.
Requirements set forth in Section 2.01 and 2.02 shall apply to the
Incoming Line Unit.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
A. UNDERVOLTAGE AND PHASE SEQUENCE RELAY
A three-phase, phase unbalance, phase reversal, phase failuare
and high low voltage relay 47/27 shall be furnished and in-
stalled on the line side of the motor starter as shown on the i
Plans, The relay shall be factory wired to the necessary
auxiliary relays 47/27 with contacts which open in the event of
high voltage-low voltage phase failure, phase reversal or phase
unbalance. Auxiliary contacts shall be connected to control
circuits as shown on the Plans. Relay shall automatically reset
upon return to normal operating conditions. The relay shall be
Turner Controls Model TC-33 B, or approved equal.
i
16181-4
B. SURGE CAPACITOR
4
Surge capacitor shall be three-phase suitable for use on
{ three-phase grounded or ungrounded system, rated 0-900 volts
RMS, phase-to-phase, Westinghouse Type DV, or approved equal.
C. LIGHTNING ARRESTOR
Arrestor shall be three-phase, rated 650 volts maximum line-
to-ground or phase-1:o-phase voltage, Delta Pt. No. LA803,
General Electric, or approved equal,
0. TIMING RELAYS
Timing relays where indicated shall have the capacity to be
hared set by an external dial, Terminals shall be front
mounted and readily accessible. Ranges shall be a:: shown on
the Plans. The timing relays shall have both normally open
{ and normally closed contacts. Timing relays where shown on
voltage of relay, the or
the Plans l, for be
operation on l the Series control time delay
equal mode
starter it is used in.
E. ELAPSED TIME METER
Where shown on the control schematics, each starter shall be
provided with an elapsed time meter. The meter shall be
General Electric KT11„ Westinghouse, or approved equal, The
meter shall be of a nun-reset type, for totalizing of hours
3 and shall operate on 120 or 240 VAC, 60 Hertz.
2,05 FINISH
All painted parts shall undergo a phosphatizing prepainting treat-
meet. All painting shall be with enamel which shall be baked for I
finish. a durable hard Color shall be ANSI-61
struments, relays, and meters shall have dull black h standard In
h,
finis
2.06 FACTORY TESTS AND ASSEMBLY
Equipment shall be completely assembled, wired, adjus.:edI and
tested at the factory. After complete assembly, each unit shall
be tested for operating sequence to assure accuracy of wiring,
correctness of control scheme, and functioning of the equipment.
Factory tests shall include electrical tests as described by ANSI
C 37.20.
1
• 16181-6
I
'.NSTALLATION
3,01 GENERAL
The equipment shall be assembled and installed in accordance with
instructions and directions furnished by the manufacturer, and as
detailed on the Plans. Manufacturer's representative shall be
available to advice the Contractor in this work.
3.02 TESTS AND VERATION
The manufacturer's representative shall be available to assist the 1
Contractor in checking the operation of the Motor Control Equip-
ment. Tests shall be conducted to assure proper operation of all
circuits. The manufacturer's representative shall assist in
1: CAI correcting any deficiences.
i 3.03 PAINTING
' t
The manufacturer shall furnish sufficient touch-up paint of the
same type and color used at the factory to repair damages incurred
in installation. r
ENO OF SECTION '
R
f
4
16181-6
V
I
l1
16500 LIGHTING SYSTEM
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish and install all lighting fixtures, j
switches, receptacles, contactors, controls, and other accessories
as required to provide the system as shown on the Plans and des-
` " cribed in these specifications.
I s r
r' 1.02 LOCATION OF OUTLETS
The appruximate locations of cabinets, panelboards, switches,
' power outlets, etc., are indicated on the Plans. Unless otherwise '
Indicated, convenience outlets shall be located l'-6" above floor,
i' wall switches shall be located d'-6" above floor, and thermostats
shall be located 5'-0" above floor.
2.00 PRODUCTS
y tl
2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES
The Contractor shall furnish and install all lighting fixtures
throughout, complete with lamps, sockets, wiring, hangers, etc.,
as required. Type of fixture shall be as follows:
Pole mounted floodlight with integral Class H isolated and regulated
i ballast (120 VAO, heavy-duty cast aluminum housing, prismatic heat
and shock-resistant glass refractor, and 250 watt high pressure
sodium lamp. Fixture shall be Sperolighting Cat. No. SF25OSPT, or
Hubbel Cat. No. tdHP-C,250S-16-8-4024C-MVMS-PCR, or approved equal. I
Light fixtures shall be mounted on 30' pole with pole bracket Ca.
No. WP-1, or approved equal. Fixture shall activate off an integral
photocell.
1 2.02 LIGHTING CONTROL/01S1RIDUTION HARDWARE
A. CONVENIENCE OUTLETS
Convenience outlets for general use shall be Underwriter's
approved heavy duty duplex grounding type, 15 ampere, 125
volts, Leviton Spec-Master No. 5262-HG, General Electric
hospital grade equal, or equal. Outlet shall have heavy
phosphor bronze contacts.
8. WEATHERPROOF CONVENIENCE OUTLETS
Weatherproof convenience outlets shall be cast boxes fitted
with a single receptacle, Rnceptacie shall be Crouse Hinds
CC71, Leviton 5261 HG, or equal with Type DS threaded cap.
j .
16500-1
i
3.00 EXECUTION
Installation of equipment shall be performed by the Contractor,
who will be required to assemble the equipment where required and
install it in accordance with Installation, Operation and Main-
tenance instructions which shall be furnished by the Vendor or
Manufacturer. All installations shall be complete, including
electrical continuity and operational tests.
END OF SECTION
nt n
Fir
I k
i
i
'Tj
,W
I
i
r
x
,
k 4'
r
,
16500••2
,
,
r,
V
L4
I
I
~ r
i
v.~
E ~ 1
'P
~f
1 ii1
11~
1YY `
T~ I~t
yJ r
111
Ai
.y i
.1
1.. pi
i1